manual azera 2011

8/10/2019 Manual Azera 2011

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manual-azera-2011 1/342

F1

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time as part of ourpolicy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla-nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may findmaterial in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUALOWNER'S MANUALOWNER'S MANUALOWNER'S MANUALOWNER'S MANUAL

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications



F3

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!



F4

A110A02A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as:

o How various systems in your vehicle were operating;o Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle orthe EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



F5

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive a Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction youreceive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet

the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2010 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor America.

!



F6

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-

signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-tomers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not coveredunder the Hyundai New Vehicle Limited

Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure ofHyundai Genuine Parts caused by theinstallation or failure of an imitation,counterfeit or used salvage part is notcovered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L



F7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &

BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX



F8

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I)

B250A01TG-AAT

OTG000101E



F9

1. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) ........ 1-932. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch (If Installed) ... 2-113. Power Adjustable Pedals Switch (If Installed) ................ 2-104. Steering Wheel Tilt & Telescopic Lever .......................1-1245. Hood Release Lever ..................................................... 1-1196. Cigarette Lighter ............................................................. 1-937. Front Ashtray ................................................................... 1-94

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air

freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

8. Front Seat Warmer Switches (If Installed) ...................... 1-25 9. Rear Window Curtain Switch (If Installed) .................... 1-12410. Passenger's Seat Belt Warning Light .............................1-7211. Digital Clock .................................................................... 1-9312. PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" Indicator ......................... 1-5513. Hazard Warning Switch .................................................. 1-9214. Power Outlet ................................................................... 1-94



F10

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II)

B250B01TG-AAT

B250B01TG-A



F11

1. Fuse Box ......................................................................... 6-172. Instrument Cluster........................................................... 1-643. Parking Brake Pedal .....................................................1-1134. Brake Pedal .................................................................... 2-105. Accelerator Pedal ...........................................................2-106. Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch ......... 1-86, 1-897. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed)................... 1-1288. Horn and Driver's Front Airbag ........................... 1-123, 1-489. Cruise Control Switch ...................................................1-125

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

10. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ..................................1-8911. Audio System (If Installed) ............................................1-14612. Passenger's Front Airbag ............................................... 1-4813. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel .......................1-13214. Glove Box ......................................................................1-10215. Accessory Box ..............................................................1-10216. Shift Lever ......................................................................... 2-617. Drink Holder ....................................................................1-9518. Center Console .............................................................1-103



YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

F12

B255A02TG-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-68.

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Front Fog Lamp Indicator Light

Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

ABS Service Reminder Indicator

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator

Lights (If Installed)

Cruise Indicator Light

Cruise SET Indicator Light

Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunc-tion Indicator (If Installed)

Immobilizer Warning Light

ECO ECO Indicator (If Installed)



F13

!CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Items contained in motor vehicles oremitted from them are known to the

State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or reproductive harm.These include:o Gasoline and its vaporso Engine exhausto Used engine oilo Interior passenger compartment

components and materialso Component parts which are subject

to heat and wearIn addition, battery posts, terminals andrelated accessories contain lead, leadcompounds and other chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancerand reproductive harm.



1

Fuel Recommendations ....................................................1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .........................................1-3

Immobilizer System ...........................................................1-3Door Locks ........................................................................1-7Theft-Alarm System ........................................................1-11Windows ..........................................................................1-14Seats ................................................................................1-18Integrated Memory System.............................................1-23Seat Belts ........................................................................1-28Child Restraint System....................................................1-36Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)

System (SRS) ................................................................1-47Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .........................1-64Warning and Indicator Lights ..........................................1-68Trip Computer .................................................................1-80Multi-Function Light Switch .............................................1-86Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ............................1-89Sunroof ............................................................................1-96Mirror ............................................................................ 1-103Homelink Mirror ............................................................ 1-107Hood Release ............................................................... 1-119

Cruise Control............................................................... 1-125Heating and Cooling Control ........................................ 1-130Stereo Sound System .................................................. 1-141Audio System................................................................ 1-144Antenna ........................................................................ 1-145


1



1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

!

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gaso-line and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol)may be used in your Hyundai. However, ifyour engine develops driveability prob-

lems, the use of 100% unleaded gasolineis recommended. Fuels with unspecifiedquantities of alcohol, or alcohols otherthan ethanol, should not be used.

B010A02NF-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.

Use of E85 fuel

E85 fuel is an alternative fuel composed of85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gaso-line, and is manufactured for use in Flex-

ible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compatiblewith your vehicle. Use of E85 may result inpoor engine performance and damage toyour vehicle's engine and fuel system.Damage resulting from the use of E85 isnot covered under Hyundai warranties.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your Hyundai.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle perfor-mance and damage components of the

fuel system.

WARNING:o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-

matically shuts off when refueling.o Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,

otherwise the " " light will illumi-nate.

o Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuel spill-age in the event of an accident.

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problemsthat are caused by the use of fuels con-taining methanol.

!




3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends you use gasolines treatedwith detergent additives, which help pre-vent deposit formation in the engine. These

gasolines will help the engine run cleanerand enhance performance of the Emis-sion Control System.

B020A01TG-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, you cancontribute to the economical operation

and durability of your Hyundai by observ-ing the following recommendations dur-ing the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/ h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute) be-tween 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start

quickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to

avoid hard stops.o Whether going fast or slow, vary your

speed from time to time.o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3

minutes at one time.o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200

miles (2,000 km) of operation.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

B880A01TG-AAT

The immobilizer system is an anti-theftdevice, designed to deter automobile theft.

To deactivate the immobilizer system: Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder

and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

! WARNING:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the equipment.




4

!

B880B03TG-AAT

Two Types of Keys

For greater convenience, your Hyundai

has two types of keys as shown in theillustration.

1) Master keyUsed to start the engine, lock and unlockthe doors, lock and unlock the glove box,and open the trunk.

! WARNING:In order to prevent theft of your vehicle,do not leave spare keys anywhere inyour vehicle. Your immobilizer password

is a customer unique password andshould be kept confidential. Do not leavethis number anywhere in your vehicle.

2) Sub keyUsed only to start the engine and lockand unlock the door.

CAUTION:o If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

o When starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keys inclose proximity; otherwise, the en-gine may not start or may stop soonafter it starts.Keep each key separated from oneanother.

o Do not install the metal accessoriesnear the key or ignition switch.The engine may not start for the metal

accessories may interrupt the tran-sponder signal from normally trans-mitting.

OTG040004A

OTG040004




5

B031A01TG-AAT

Before leaving sub key with parkingattendant

When leaving the sub key with a parkingattendant, the following procedures willensure that your vehicle's trunk and glovebox can not be unlocked in your absence.

1. Unlock the glove box with the masterkey and open it.

2. Set the trunk lid control button in theglove box to the "OFF" position (notdepressed). In the "OFF" position, thetrunk can not be unlocked with either

the trunk release lever or trunk unlockbutton of transmitter.

3. Close the glove box, and lock the glovebox using the master key.

B541A01TG

4. Leave the sub key with the attendant.Trunk and glove box are secured be-cause the sub key only allows ignitionand door lock operation.

B880C01NF-GAT

Key Numbers

! CAUTION:Do not change, alter or adjust the immo-bilizer system because it could causethe immobilizer system to malfunctionand should only be serviced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe immobilizer system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

The vehicle key num-ber is recorded on anumber tag attached tothe keys when the

vehicle is first delivered to you.The key number should be recorded andkept in a safe place in case the need toorder further keys arises. New keys are

available from any Hyundai dealer byquoting the relevant key number.In the interest of security, the number tagattached to the keys which bears the keynumber should be removed from the keystring after you receive your new vehicle.In addition, key numbers cannot be pro-vided by Hyundai for security reasons.If you need additional keys or if you shouldlose your keys, your authorized Hyundaidealer can make new keys if you cansupply the key number and master key.




6

!

NOTE:This password is created by the vehicleowner, but only an authorized Hyundaidealer can input this customer specified4-digit password into the vehicle'smemory using a specialized tool.If the vehicle is transferred to a newowner, the new owner must create a newpassword and have a Hyundai dealerover-write and input the new password.

1. To activate the password, turn the igni-tion key "ON" and "OFF" according tothe digit numbers. The immobilizer indi-cator will blink along with the operationof the ignition key. For example, turn the

ignition key once for digit number "1",and twice for "2", and so on. For the digitnumber "0", you must cycle the ignitionkey 10 times.

2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.3. You may set the remaining number of

digits by following steps 1 and 2.4. If all of the four password digits have

been successfully entered, turn the ig-nition key "ON" and check that the im-

mobilizer indicator illuminates. Fromthis time, you have to start your enginewithin 30 seconds. If you try to start yourengine after 30 seconds, your enginewill not start.

If the immobilizer warning indicator blinksfor five seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, this indicatesthe immobilizer system requires service.The engine cannot be started without us-ing the procedure below.The following procedure describes how tostart the engine using the limp home func-tion (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample password).

CAUTION:

o If the password is entered incorrectlythree consecutive times, wait for aboutone hour to perform the limp homeactivation procedure again.

o If you cannot start your engine usingthe limp home activation procedure,have your vehicle towed by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

B880D01TG-AAT

"Limp Home" Mode and RelatedProcedures

HNF2011

NOTE:If the engine stalls while driving in the"limp home" mode, you can start yourengine within 3 seconds without re-en-tering the password.

If the immobilizer indicator blinks for fiveseconds, you must re-enter the password(steps 1~4).

After performing the limp home activationprocedure, consult with your authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.




7

B030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

Whenever either front door is opened, theignition switch will be illuminated for your

convenience, provided the ignition switchis not in the "ON" position.The light will go off approximately 30 sec-onds after closing the door or when theignition switch is turned on.

B030C01E

DOOR LOCKS

!

B040A01A-AAT

WARNING:o Before you drive away (especially if

there are children in the car), be surethat all the doors are securely closed

and locked so that the doors cannotbe opened from the inside. This helpsensure that the doors will not beopened accidentally. Also, when com-bined with the proper use of seat belts,locking the doors helps keep occu-pants from being ejected from the carin case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

o If you don't close the door securely,the door may open again.o Be careful that someone's body and

hands are not trapped when closingthe door.

B040B01O-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors witha key

o The door can be locked or unlocked

with a key.o Lock the door by turning the key toward

the front of the vehicle and unlock it byturning the key toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked byturning the key once toward the rear. Ifyou wish to unlock all doors, turn the keyagain toward the rear within 4 seconds.

OTG040006

LOCK UNLOCK




8

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened and

you may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

!

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking from the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key. Tolock the doors from the outside, first push

the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" posi-tion, so that the red mark on the switch is notvisible, then close the door.The door will not lock if the key is left in theignition switch when the front doors areclosed. This is normal operation.

B040C01TG-A

B040D01NF-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simplyclose the door and push the lock switch tothe "LOCK" position.

HTG2009

LOCKUNLOCK

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be

careful not to lock the door with thekey left in the vehicle.

o To discourage theft, always removethe ignition key, close all windows andlock all doors when leaving your ve-hicle unattended.

NOTE:o When the door is locked, the red mark

on the switch is not visible.o The driver's and front passenger's

doors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the insidelock switch is pushed to the "LOCK"position.




9

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.

When the lock mechanism is engaged, therear door cannot be opened from the in-side. Its use is recommended wheneverthere are small children in the rear seat.

To engage the child-protector feature sothat the door cannot be opened from theinside, move the child-protector lever tothe " " position and close the door. Movethe lever to the " " position when normaldoor operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

HTG2011-1

B040G02NF-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is locatedon the driver's and front passenger's arm-

rest. It is operated by depressing the doorlock switch. If any door is open when theswitch is depressed to the "LOCK" posi-tion, the door will remain locked whenclosed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion of

the driver's or front passenger's doorlock switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

o When depressing the rear portion ofthese switches, all vehicle doors willunlock.

OTG040823

Driver's side

Front passenger's side

LOCK UNLOCK

LOCKUNLOCK

! WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the in-side door handle, the door can be openedand you may be ejected from the ve-hicle and can be injured or killed.

o The driver's and front passenger'sdoors can be opened by pulling theinside door handle even if the frontportion of the driver's or frontpassenger's central door lockingswitch has been depressed to lock the doors.

o If the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with eitherthe vehicle key or door lock switch,the system may stop operating tem-porarily in order to protect the circuitand prevent damage to system com-ponents.




10

B070F02NF-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEMLocking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK ( )" button on the

transmitter.3. At the same time, all doors lock and the

turn signal lights will blink once to indi-

cate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK ( )" button on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time, the driver's door un-locks and the turn signal lights will blinktwice to indicate that the system is dis-armed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all the doors, pressthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the trunk lid release button ( ) onthe transmitter for longer than 1 second.

D050400BEN-EU

Auto door lock/unlock feature(If Installed)

o All doors will be automatically lockedwhen shifting the transaxle shift leverout of P(Park).

o All doors will be automatically unlockedwhen shifting the transaxle shift leverinto P(Park).

NOTE:An authorized Hyundai dealer can acti-vate or deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock features as follows;o Speed sensing auto door lockingo Auto door unlock by using the driver's

door lock buttono Auto door unlock when the ignition

key is removed from the ignitionswitch

o Auto door lock/unlock when shiftingthe transaxle shift lever out of P(Park)or into P (Park)

If you want to activate or deactivatesome auto door lock/unlock features,consult an authorized Hyundai dealer.

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

!WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the equipment. If thekeyless entry system is inoperativedue to changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance, it will not becovered by your manufacturer’s ve-hicle warranty.




11THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

This system is designed to provide protec-tion from unauthorized entry into the car.This system is operated in three stages :the first is the "Armed" stage, the second isthe "Alarm" stage and the third is the "Dis-

armed" stage. If triggered, the system pro-vides an audible alarm with blinking of theturn signal lights.

B070B01TG-AAT

Armed Stage

OTG040207

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as follows:

1) Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood andtrunk lid are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system or lock thedriver's door using the key after closingthe all doors.

If the steps are completed as above, thesecurity LED lamp on the passenger’scrash pad will illuminate for about 30 sec-onds, and then the lamp will blink continu-ously when the system is entered into thearmed stage. The turn signal lights willblink and audible alarm will sound once toindicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system aspreviously described.

NOTE:The transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Hyundai Dealer.

NOTE:Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orother liquids, it will not be covered byyour manufacturer vehicle warranty.

LOCK

UNLOCK

TRUNK UNLOCK




12

B070C02TG-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened withoutusing the transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The trunk lid is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The alarm horn will sound and the turnsignal lights will blink continuously for 27seconds (This will repeat 3 times). To turnoff the system, unlock the door or trunk lidwith the transmitter or the ignitio kdy.

NOTE:Do not arm the system until all passen-gers have left the car. If the system isarmed while a passenger(s) remains inthe car, the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leaves thecar.

B070D01TG-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system can be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

Only the driver's door is unlocked by de-pressing once the "UNLOCK ( )" button

on the transmitter. If you wish to unlock alldoors, press the "UNLOCK ( )" button onthe transmitter again within 4 seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed,the turn signal lights will blink and audiblealarm will sound twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:

Although the system is disarmed, thesecurity LED lamp will blink continu-ously. Insert the key in the ignition keycylinder to turn off the lamp.

If any door, trunk lid or engine hood is notopened or the ignition key is not insertedin the ignition switch within 30 seconds,the system will be rearmed.

NOTE:When the system is disarmed while the"DOOR" button for the interior light switchis depressed, the interior light will illumi-nate for 30 seconds.

B070E01TG-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button (1) on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time, the alarm horn willsound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"button again on the transmitter.

OTG040207

(1)




13

B070E01NF-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins toget weak, it may take several pushes onthe button to lock or unlock the doors, andthe LED will not light. Replace the battery

as soon as possible.Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gentlypry open the transmitter center cover.

2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.

CAUTION:Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could causethe theft-alarm system to malfunction.The system should only be serviced byan authorized Hyundai dealer.Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe theft-alarm system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

! CAUTION:An inappropriately disposed battery canbe harmful to the environment and hu-man health. Dispose the battery accord-ing to your local law(s) or regulation.

!

OBH040004




14 WINDOWS

OTG040829

1. Driver's door power window switch2. Front passenger's door power window

switch3. Rear passenger's door power window

switch (left side)

4. Rear passenger's door power windowswitch (right side)

5. Window lock switch

B060D01NF-GAT




15

B060A01TG-GAT

POWER WINDOWS

The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. The

main switches are located on the driver'sarmrest and control the front and rear win-dows on both sides of the vehicle. Thewindows may be opened by depressingthe appropriate window switch and closedby pulling up the switch. To open the win-dow on the driver's side, press the switchhalfway down. The window moves as longas the switch is operated.

OTG040830

Open Close

NOTE:While driving with the rear windows downor with the sunroof (if installed) in anopen (or partially open) position, yourvehicle may demonstrate a wind buffet-ing or pulsation noise. This noise is anormal occurrence and can be reduced

or eliminated by taking the followingactions: - If the noise occurs with one or both of

the rear windows down, partially lowerboth front windows approximately oneinch.

- If you experience the noise with thesunroof open, slightly reduce the sizeof the sunroof opening. To open the window, press the switch

halfway down. To close the window, pull

up the switch. The window moves as longas the switch is operated.

OTG040833

Window opening and closing




16

Window Lock

OTG040824L

o In order to prevent operation of thepassenger front and rear windows, awindow lock switch is provided on thearmrest of the driver's door. To disablethe power windows, press the windowlock switch. To revert to normal opera-tion, press the window lock switch asecond time.

o When the power window lock switch isON, the driver's master control canotoperate the passenger door powerwindows.

NOTE:If the battery has been recharged ordisconnected, the auto up/down windowsystem must be reset as follows;

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position.2. Close driver’s window and continue

pulling up on driver’s power windowswitch for at least 1 second after thewindow is completely closed.

If the auto up/down window is not reset,the feature may not operate properly.

Auto Up/Down Window

To fully open the window automatically,

press the switch fully down. To fully closethe window automatically, pull the switchfully up. In automatic operation, the win-dow will fully open or close even if you letgo of the switch. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up or depress and releasethe switch to the opposite direction of themovement.

(Driver's side)

OTG040831




17

!

!WARNING:

o The automatic reverse feature is onlyactive when the “auto up” feature isused by fully pulling up the switch. The

automatic reverse feature will notoperate if the window is raised usingthe halfway position on the power win-dow switch.

o Always check for obstructions be-fore raising any window to avoid inju-ries or vehicle damage. If an objectless than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameteris caught between the window glassand the upper window channel, theautomatic reverse window may not

detect the resistance and will not stopand reverse direction.

B060C02TG-AAT

Automatic Reverse Feature(Driver's side)

If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body, thewindow will detect the resistance and will

stop upward movement. The window willthen lower approximately 11.8 in.(30cm)to allow the object to be cleared.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-tions, or removed from the ignitionswitch.If the front doors are opened during this

30 second period, the power windowscan no longer be operated without theignition key turned to the "ON" position.

CAUTION:o To prevent possible damage to the

power window system, do not open orclose two windows or more at the

same time. This will also ensure thelongevity of the fuse.

o Never try to operate the main switchon the driver's door and the individualdoor window switch in opposing di-rections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and cannotbe opened or closed.

WARNING - Windowso NEVER leave the ignition key in the

vehicle.o NEVER leave any child unattended in

the vehicle. Even very young childrenmay inadvertently cause the vehicleto move, entangle themselves in thewindows, or otherwise injure them-selves or others.

o Always double check to make sure allarms, hands, head and other obstruc-tions are safely out of the way beforeclosing a window.

o Do not allow children to play with thepower windows. Keep the driver’s

door power window lock switch in theLOCK position (depressed). Seriousinjury can result from unintentionalwindow operation by the child.

o Do not extend any head or arms out-side through the window opening whiledriving.

!




18 SEATS

Driver’s seat

1. Lumbar support control knob2. Seatback recliner control knob3. Seat forward/rearward/height control

knob4. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

Front passenger’s seat

5. Seatback recliner control knob6. Seat forward/rearward control knob7. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

B080A01TG-AAT

B080A01TG-A




19

!

B090A02TG-AAT

FRONT POWER SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted appropri-ately by using the control knob of the seat.Before driving, adjust the seat to the properposition so as to easily control the steeringwheel, pedals and switches on the instru-ment panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the sametime.

WARNING:

o Never adjust the driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. Any sudden orunexpected movement of the seatcould cause you to lose control of thevehicle resulting in an accident. Onlyadjust the driver’s seat when the ve-hicle is stationary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat so thatyou can sit as far back as possible

from the airbag and still comfortablyreach all controls.o Use extreme caution so that hands or

other objects are not caught in theseat mechanisms while the seat ismoving.

!

B090B01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear-ward

Pull the control knob forward or rearward

to move the seat forward or rearward to thedesired position. Release the control knoband the seat will remain at that position.

OTG020037

B090D01NF-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Pull the upper portion of the control knobforward or backward to recline the seatback

to the desired position. Release the con-trol knob and the seatback will remain inthat position.

OTG020040




20

! WARNING:o Riding with a reclined seatback in-

creases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a collisionor sudden stop. The protection of

your restraint system (seat belts andairbags) is greatly reduced by reclin-ing your seat. Seat belts must be snugagainst your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chance thatan occupant's hips will slide under thelap belt or the occupant's neck willstrike the shoulder belt. Drivers andpassengers should always sit well

back in their seats, properly belted,and with the seatbacks upright.o Do not use a sitting cushion that re-

duces friction between the seat andpassenger. The passenger's hips mayslide under the lap portion of the seatbelt during an accident or a suddenstop. Serious or fatal internal injuriescould result because the seat beltcan't operate normally.

o Do not put a cigarette lighter on thefloor or seat. When you operate theseat, gas may gush out of the lighterand cause fire.

C010104AMC

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for the

occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfort forthe driver and front passenger, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.

OBH038075L

!WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident, the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the head-rest is at the same height as the cen-ter of gravity of an occupant's head.Generally, the center of gravity ofmost people's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes. Also,adjust the headrest as close to yourhead as possible. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with the

headrests removed as severe injuryto the occupants may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrests mayprovide protection against neck inju-ries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest position ofthe driver's seat while the vehicle is inmotion.




21

B081D01TG-AAT

Forward and Rearward Headrest Ad-justment

The headrest may be adjusted forward to

3 different positions by pulling the head-rest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest backwardsposition, pull it fully forward to the farthestposition and release it. Adjust the headrestso that it properly supports the head andneck.

HTG2045

Adjusting the Headrest height upand down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

OTG039010

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.

OTG039011

! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protects the

occupants.




22

B083D02NF-AAT

Active Headrest (If Installed)

The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.

This helps to prevent the driver's and frontpassenger's heads from moving rearwardand thus helps minimize neck injuries.

HNF2041-1

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's seat only)

Move the front portion of the control knob

up or down to raise or lower the front partof the seat cushion. Move the rear portionof the control knob up or down to raise orlower the rear part of the seat cushion.

OTG020041

B090E01TG-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

To adjust the lumbar support, press the

control switch on the outboard side of theseat cushion. To increase the amount oflumbar support, press the front portion ofthe switch. To decrease lumbar support,press the rear portion of the switch.

HTG2042-2

!WARNING:

A gap between the seat and the headrestrelease button may appear when seat-ing on the seat or when you push or pullthe seat. Be careful not to get your finger,etc. caught in the gap.




23

! CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.S willnot memorize a position.

o When the "1" or "2" button is notpushed within five seconds.

o When the seat is being adjusted.o When the key is not in the "ON" posi-

tion.o When the shift lever is positioned in

other than "P" position.

To memorize a position

1. Place the shift lever into "P" while theignition switch is ON.

2. Adjust the driver's seat, outside rear-view mirrors and steering wheel (withelectric tilt and telescopic column) to the

desired position.3. Push the "SET" button on the I.M.S untilthe signal beeps.

4. Within five seconds, push button "1" or"2" until the signal beeps twice. Thebeep sounds mean that the positionsare memorized in the I.M.S.

NOTE:o If the battery has been recharged or

disconnected, the driving positionmemory will be lost.

o The buzzer sounds 10 times if there isa malfunction of the integratedmemory system. Have the I.M.S

checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

I.M.S control switch

Located on the driver's door trim and func-tions as follows;

SET: When the button is pressed, the sys-tem will memorize the position witha beep sound.

1,2 :Used to memorize 2 different posi-tions.

INTEGRATED MEMORYSYSTEM

B090E01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

The Integrated Memory System controlsare located on the driver's door trim. After

adjusting the position of the driver's seat,outside rearview mirrors and steeringwheel (with electric tilt and telescopic col-umn), use the I.M.S to memorize thosepositions. Two different driving positionprofiles can be entered in the I.M.S. Afterthe positions are memorized by the sys-tem, when the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, the memorized position isadjusted automatically.

OTG040826L




24

!

To activate the memorized position

1. Place the shift lever into "P".2. When you push button "1" or "2", the

driving position will be automaticallyadjusted to the position recorded forthat button.

CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.S willnot activate.

o When the vehicle speed is runningabove 2 MPH (3 km/h).

o When the seat is being adjusted.

o When the shift lever is positioned inother than "P" position.

In the following conditions, the memo-rized position will be activated while theignition switch is ON.

o When the driver’s door is opened.o When the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

L/R : When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch knob is se-lected to the "L or R" position, bothoutside rearview mirrors will movedownward.

Neutral : When the remote control out-side rearview mirror switch knob

is placed in the middle position,the outside rearview mirrors willnot move downward while thevehicle is moving backward.

NOTE:The outside rearview mirrors will auto-matically revert to their original posi-tions under the following conditions:

1. Ignition key is in the "LOCK" position.

2. Shift lever is moved to any positionexcept "R".

3. Remote control outside rearview mir-ror switch knob is placed in the middleposition.

Reverse Parking Aid Function(If Installed)

While the vehicle is moving backward, the

outside rearview mirrors will move down-ward to aid reverse parking. According tothe position of the outside rearview mirrorswitch knob(1), the outside rearview mir-rors will operate as follows:

OTG040828E



1


25

B100A01TG-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch is ON.

When the switch is ON, a number rangingfrom 1 to 5 is displayed on the switch (5 =warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set the switchto 0.

B100A01TG

NOTE:With the seat warmer switch in the ONposition, the heating system in the seatturns off or on automatically dependingon the seat temperature.

! CAUTION:o When cleaning the seats, do not use

an organic solvent such as paint thin-ner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.Doing so may damage the surface ofthe heater or seats.

o To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets, cush-ions or seat covers on the seats while

the seat warmer is in operation.o Do not place heavy or sharp objects

on seats equipped with seat warm-ers. Damage to the seat warming com-ponents could occur.

! WARNING- Seat warmer burns :

Passengers should use extreme cau-tion when using seat warmers due to thepossibility of excess heating or burns.

The occupants must be able to feel if theseat is becoming too warm and to turnthe seat warmer off. In particular, thedriver must exercise extreme care forthe following types of passengers:1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled

persons, or hospital outpatients2. Persons with sensitive skin or those

that burn easily3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication that cancause drowsiness or sleepiness(sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)



1


26

B110A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATFolding Rear Seatbacks

o Make sure the rear seat belt webbing is

in the guide to prevent the seat belt frombeing damaged.o To unlock the seatback, pull the

seatback release lever, then pull for-ward on the seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure it haslocked into position by pulling and push-ing on the top of the seatback.

OTG030301

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accom-modated. Do not allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded down seatback, whilethe car is moving as this is not a properseating position and no seat belts areavailable for use. This could result inserious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects car-ried on the folded down seatback shouldnot extend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slideforward and cause injury or damage

during sudden stops.

C010303BUN

Headrest

OBH038076L

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfort forpassengers, but also helps to protect thehead and neck in the event of a collision.

*: if installed

*

! WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, the auto-matic transaxle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is securely applied when-ever loading or unloading cargo. Failureto take these steps may allow the ve-hicle to move if the shift lever is inadvert-

ently moved to another position.



1


27

!WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident, the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the head-rest is at the same height as the cen-

ter of gravity of an occupant's head.Generally, the center of gravity ofmost people's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes. Also,adjust the headrest as close to yourhead as possible. The use of a cush-ion that holds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as severe injury

to an occupant may occur in the eventof an accident. Headrests may pro-vide protection against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted.

Adjusting the height up and down(If Installed)

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal and installation (If Installed)

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.

OTG030012

OTG039013

! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protect the

occupants.



1


28 SEAT BELTS

!

B150A02S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must weartheir seat belts at all times. Seat belts and

child restraints reduce the risk of seriousor fatal injuries for all occupants in theevent of a collision or sudden stop. With-out a seat belt, occupants could be shiftedtoo close to a deploying airbag, strike theinterior structure or be thrown from thevehicle. Properly worn seat belts greatlyreduce these hazards. Even with ad-vanced airbags, unbelted occupants canbe severely injured by a deploying airbag.Always follow the precautions about seatbelts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.

B150B04Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific require-ments in your state. Child and/or infantsafety seats must be properly placed andinstalled in the rear seat. Information about

the use of these restraints begins on page1-36.

! WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includ-ing infants and children. Never hold achild in your arms or lap when riding in a

vehicle. The violent forces created dur-ing a crash will tear the child from yourarms and throw the child against theinterior. Always use a child restraintappropriate for your child's height andweight.

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNINGFor the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higher

than the top of the seatback. In addition,do not place objects on the rear shelf asthey may move forward during brakingor in an accident and may strike andinjure vehicle passengers.




29

NOTE:Small children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properly re-strained in the rear seat by a child re-straint system that meets the require-ments of the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Before buying any

child restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meets Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.The restraint must be appropriate foryour child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for thisinformation.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child re-straint systems should always occupy therear seat and use the available lap/shoul-der belts. The lap portion should be fas-tened snug on the hips and as low as

possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out ofposition. Children are afforded the mostsafety in the event of an accident whenthey are restrained by a proper restraintsystem in the rear seat. If a larger child(over age 13) must be seated in the frontseat, the child should be securely re-strained by the available lap/shoulder beltand the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children under the ageof 13 should be restrained securely in therear seat. NEVER place a child under theage of 13 in the front seat. NEVER place arear facing child seat in the front seat of avehicle.

C020302AKM

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of the beltshould be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW

AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not across theabdomen.

!WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place thelap portion of the safety belt over thearea of the abdomen where the fetus islocated or above the abdomen where the

belt could crush the fetus during an im-pact.




30

!

B160A02A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to dam-age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Besure that the webbing or buckle does notget caught or pinched in the rear seat. A

seat belt with damaged webbing or bucklewill not be as strong and could possiblyfail during a collision or sudden stop,resulting in serious injury.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt. Thiscould increase the severity of injuries incase of an accident.

WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback increasesyour chance of serious or fatal injuries inthe event of a collision or sudden stop.The protection of your restraint system

(seat belts and airbags) is greatly re-duced by reclining your seat. Seat beltsmust be snug against your hips and chestto work properly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance that anoccupant's hips will slide under the lapbelt causing serious internal injuries orthe occupant's neck could strike theshoulder belt. Drivers and passengersshould always sit well back in their seats,properly belted, and with the seatbacksupright.

!

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie DownTo reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint system,all passengers should be sitting up and thefront seats should be in an upright positionwhen the car is moving. A seat belt cannotprovide proper protection if the person islying down in the rear seat or if the front seatis in a reclined position.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this isnecessary, you should consult a physicianfor recommendations.




31

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. Ifbelts become dirty, they can be cleaned byusing a mild soap solution and warm wa-ter. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abra-sives should not be used because theymay damage and weaken the fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assem-blies should be replaced if the vehicle hasbeen involved in an accident. This shouldbe done even if no damage is visible.Additional questions concerning seat beltoperation should be directed to your

Hyundai Dealer.

B170A04A-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maxi-mum comfort and safety.The height of the seat belt should not be toonear your neck. The shoulder portionshould be adjusted so that it lies acrossyour chest and midway over your shouldernearest the door and not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into anappropriate position.

HTG2058

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or damageof any kind. Parts of the system that aredamaged should be replaced as soon aspossible.

!

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. Tolower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjusterdown to make sure that it has locked intoposition.

WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appropriateheight. Never position the shoulderbelt across your neck or face. Im-properly positioned seat belts cancause serious injuries in an accident.

o Failure to replace seat belts after anaccident could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not provideprotection in the event of anothercollision leading to personal injury ordeath. Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident as soon as pos-sible.




33

!

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system pro-

tection, the seat belts must always beused whenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children age 12 and younger mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to ridein the front passenger seat. If a childover 13 must be seated in the frontseat, he/she must be properly beltedand the seat should be moved as farback as possible.

o Never wear the shoulder belt underyour arm or behind your back. Animproperly positioned shoulder belt

can cause serious injuries in a crash.The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over your shoulder acrossyour collarbone.

!

o If the front passenger's seat belt is notfastened when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning light on the center fasciapanel will blink for approximately sixseconds to remind the front passen-ger to fasten the front passenger's

seat belt.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. Ina collision, it could even cut into you.Be sure the belt webbing is straight

and not twisted.o Be careful not to damage the belt web-

bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

o When you fasten the seat belt, becareful not to latch the seat belt inbuckles of other seat. It's very dan-gerous and you may not be protectedby the seat belt properly.

o Do not unfasten the seat belt and donot fasten and unfasten the seat beltrepeatedly while driving. This couldresult in loss of control, and an acci-dent causing death, serious injury, orproperty damage.

o When fastening the seat belt, makesure that the seat belt does not passover objects that are hard or can break easily.

o Make sure there is nothing in thebuckle. The seat belt may not be fas-

tened securely.

WARNING:

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion aslow as possible and snugly across yourhips, not on your waist. If the lap belt islocated too high on your waist, it mayincrease the chance of injury in the eventof a collision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, one shouldbe over and the other under, as shown inthe illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01NF




34

3. After confirming that (a) and (b) arelatched, pull the seat belt out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (c) intothe buckle (d).

B220A02TG

B200A02NF-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With CombinationLocking Retractor (If Installed)

1. Pull the seat belt out of the rear seatpackage tray.

2. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle(b) are latched together.

B220A01TG

The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automaticallydraw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to besure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01NF




35

There will be an audible "click" when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat belt auto-matically adjusts to the proper length onlyafter the lap belt is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips. If youlean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around.If there is a sudden stop or impact, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

! WARNING:o Never let anyone ride in the rear cen-

ter seat without fastening all metaltabs and buckles as described in thissection. This seat belt is designed to

function as a typical 3-point restraint(lap/shoulder belt). Using only theshoulder portion or lap portion of thebelt can result in serious or fatal inju-ries in the event of a collision or sud-den stop.

o Never unlock the metal tab (A) and thebuckle (B) with the following excep-tions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.

(2) If transporting an object on therear seat may cause damage tothe rear seat center belt.

B180A01NF-E

!

B220A03TG

To disconnect the metal tab (A) from thebuckle (B), insert a narrow-ended tool intothe groove located on the buckle (B).

WARNING:Always lock metal tab (A) into buckle (B)immediately after returning the rearseatbacks to an upright position. Thisportion of the rear center seat belt shouldonly be unbuckled when the rearseatback is folded down.




37

!To reduce the chance or serious or fatalinjuries:o Children of all ages are safer when

restrained in the rear seat. A child

riding in the front passenger seat canbe forcefully struck by an inflatingairbag resulting in serious or fatalinjuries.

o Always follow the instructions for in-stallation and use of the child restraintmaker.

o Always make sure the child seat issecured properly in the car and yourchild is securely restrained in the childseat.

o Never hold a child in your arms or lapwhen riding in a vehicle. The violentforces created during a crash will tearthe child from your arms and throwthe child against the car’s interior.

o Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, the beltcould press deep into the child caus-ing serious internal injuries.

o Never leave children unattended in avehicle – not even for a short time.The car can heat up very quickly,resulting in serious injuries to chil-

dren inside. Even very young chil-dren may inadvertently cause thevehicle to move, entangle themselvesin the windows, or lock themselves orothers inside the vehicle.

o Never allow two children, or any twopersons, to use the same seat belt.

o Children often squirm and repositionthemselves improperly. Never let achild ride with the shoulder belt undertheir arm or behind their back. Al-ways properly position and securechildren in rear seat.

o Never allow a child to stand-up orkneel on the seat or floorboard of amoving vehicle. During a collision orsudden stop, the child can be violentlythrown against the vehicles interior,resulting in serious injury.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a

seatback, it may not provide adequatesecurity in an accident.

! WARNING: WARNING: ! WARNING:o Seat belts can become very hot, es-

pecially when the car is parked indirect sunlight. Always check seatbelt buckles before fastening them

over a child.o Always store or secure a child seat,even when it is not in use. During acollision or sudden stop, the child seatcould be thrown inside the vehicle.

o After an accident, have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer check the child re-straint system, seat belt, tether an-chor and lower anchor.

o If there is not enough space to placethe child restraint system because ofthe driver's seat, install the child re-straint system in the rear right seat.




38

CRS09

OUN026150

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be of appro-priate size for the child and should beinstalled in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.

! WARNING:Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger seat, because ofthe danger that an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-facingchild restraint and kill the child.

Since all passenger seat belts move freelyunder normal conditions and only lockunder extreme or emergency conditions(emergency locking mode), you mustmanually change these seat belts to the

automatic locking mode to secure a childrestraint.

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraintis not properly anchored to the ve-hicle and the child is not properly

restrained in the child restraint. Be-fore installing the child restraint sys-tem, read the instructions supplied bythe child restraint system manufac-turer.

o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed in this section, have thesystem checked immediately by yourauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

o Failure to observe this manual's in-structions regarding child restraint

systems and the instructions pro-vided with the child restraint systemcould increase the chance and/orseverity of injury in an accident.

o Before installing a Child Restraint Sys-tem to vehicles fitted with CurtainAirbags, always refer to safety noticesfor Curtain Airbag systems in thismanual. Whenever installing child re-straints, use only approved devices

and refer to the "Child Restraint Sys-tem" section to ensure correct instal-lation and that occupant protection ismaximized.

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Forward-facing child restraint system




39

Placing a passenger seat belt into theautomatic locking mode

The automatic locking mode will help pre-vent the normal movement of the child in

the vehicle from causing the seat belt toloosen and compromise the child restraintsystem. To secure a child restraint system,use the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions. Be sure the seat belt webbing isnot twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

E2MS103005 OEN036101 OBH039102

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat beltall the way out. When the shoulderportion of the seat belt is fully extended,it will shift the retractor to the “Aautomatic

locking” (child restraint) mode.




40

OEN036104

5. Remove as much slack from the belt aspossible by pushing down on the childrestraint system while feeding the shoul-der belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the seat belt and repeat steps 2through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the“Automatic locking” mode by attempt-ing to pull more of the seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor is inthe “Automatic locking” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the

release button on the buckle and then pullthe lap/shoulder belt out of the restraintand allow the seat belt to retract fully.

! WARNING - Automatic locking mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically re-turns to the “emergency lock mode”whenever the belt is allowed to retract

fully. Therefore, the preceding sevensteps must be followed each time a childrestraint is installed.If the retractor is not in the AutomaticLocking mode, the child restraint canmove when your vehicle turns or stopssuddenly. A child can be seriously in-jured or killed if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car, includingsetting the retractor to the AutomaticLocking mode.

When the seat belt is allowed to retractto its fully stowed position, the retractorwill automatically switch from the “Auto-matic locking” mode to the emergencylock mode for normal adult usage.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of theseat belt to retract and listen for anaudible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.This indicates that the retractor is in the“automatic locking” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OBH039103




41

!

For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap over thetop of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to thechild restraint hook holder and tighten

to secure the seat.

WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraintis not properly anchored. Alwaysfollow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

o Never mount more than one child re-

straint to a single tether anchor or toa single lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or loweranchorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.

B230C02TG

Rear seat package tray

Tether Strap Hook

Child Restraint Hook Holders

B230C05A-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are lo-cated on the rear seat package tray.

To install the child restraint seat

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.

B230C01TG

Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint

Hook Holder

Front of Vehicle




42

!WARNING:

o A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a collision if the child restraintis not properly anchored. Alwaysfollow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.o Never install a child restraint usingthe LATCH lower anchors at the cen-ter position of the rear seat. In a crash,the LATCH lower anchors may break if a car seat is improperly placed in thecenter position resulting in serious orfatal injuries. Only place a LATCH orLATCH-compatible child seat in theleft or right out-board rear seatingpositions (as shown) to the appropri-

ate LATCH anchors provided.

!o Never mount more than one child re-

straint to a single tether or to a singlelower anchorage point. The increasedload caused by multiple seats may

cause the tethers or anchorage pointsto break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o When using the vehicle’s “LATCH”system to install a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, all unused ve-hicle rear seat belt metal latch platesor tabs must be latched securely intheir seat belt buckles and the seatbelt webbing must be retracted be-hind the child restraint to prevent the

child from reaching and taking hold ofunretracted seat belts. Unlatchedmetal latch plates or tabs may allowthe child to reach the unretracted seatbelts which may result in strangula-tion and a serious injury or death tothe child in the child restraint.

o Do not place anything around the loweranchors. Also make sure that the seatbelt is not caught in the lower anchors.

WARNING:

B230D08E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat withthe "Child Seat Lower Anchor" sys-tem

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child seats. LATCH stands for"Lower anchors and Tethers for Children".These seats include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that connect to twoLATCH anchors at specific seating posi-tions in your vehicle. This type of child seateliminates the need to use seat belts toattach the child seat in the rear seats.

B230D01NF




43

!

Child restraint symbols are located on theleft and right rear seatbacks to indicate theposition of the lower anchors for childrestraints.

B230D02TG

Lower Anchor

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

OTG030304

Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-structions to properly install child restraintseats with LATCH or LATCH-compatibleattachments.

! CAUTION:Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing toget scratched or pinched by the childseat latch and LATCH anchor during theinstallation.

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors are lo-cated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is no LATCH

anchor provided for the center rear seatingposition.The LATCH anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.

Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint seat, assure that the seat is prop-erly attached to the LATCH and tetheranchors. Also, test the safety seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat forward.Check to see if the anchors hold the seatin place.

WARNING:A child can be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car and thechild is not properly restrained in thechild restraint. Always follow the childseat manufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.




44

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion:

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Buckle pre-tensioner assembly

B180B01TG

1

23

Driver's airbag

Passenger'sairbag

4

! CAUTION:Do not put anything near the buckle.Placing objects near the buckle can ad-versely affect the buckle pre-tensionerand may increase the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision.

If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on the af-fected seat belt.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into position.In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat beltinto tighter contact against the occupant'sbody. The buckle pre-tensioner (which isinstalled in the buckle) will also pull theseat belt into the buckle.

B180B03TG-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner

is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certain fron-tal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated alone or, where the fron-tal collision is severe enough, togetherwith the airbags.

OED030300

! WARNING:For your safety, be sure that the belt

webbing is not loose or twisted and al-ways sit properly on your seat.




45

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

o The seatbelt must be worn correctlyand adjusted to the proper position.

Please read and follow all of the im-portant information and precautionsabout your vehicle’s occupant safetyfeatures – including seat belts andadvanced airbags – that are providedin this manual.

o Be sure you and your passengersalways wear seat belts and wear themproperly.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front

passenger's pre-tensioner seat beltswill be activated in certain frontal col-lisions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated alone or, where thefrontal collision is severe enough,together with the airbags.The pre-tensioners will not be acti-vated if the seat belts are not beingworn at the time of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in the passen-ger compartment. These are normaloperating conditions and are not haz-ardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly after an accident in whichthe pre-tensioner seat belts were ac-tivated.

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS

airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt. The SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition key hasbeen turned to the "ON" position, andthen it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is no mal-function of the SRS airbag. If the SRSairbag warning light does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illuminated

after approximately 6 seconds whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, have an au-thorized Hyundai dealer inspect theadvanced SRS airbag system as soonas possible.

!

AIR

BAG




46

! WARNING:o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies, and failure toheed the warnings not to strike, modify,inspect, replace, service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt and buckleassemblies may lead to improperoperation or inadvertent activationand serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts when driv-ing or riding in a motor vehicle.

o If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seatbelt must be discarded, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-

ate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts and seat beltbuckles must be replaced. All seatbelts, of any type, should always bereplaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during acti-vation. Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies for several min-utes after they have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe pre-tensioner seat belts yourself.This must be done by an authorized

Hyundai dealer.o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat

belt or buckle assemblies.o Do not attempt to service or repair the

pre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.




47

B240D01TG-AAT

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Front side impact airbag4. Rear side impact airbag (If Installed)5. Curtain airbag

B240D01TG

! WARNING:Even in vehicles with air bags, you andyour passengers must always wear theseat belts provided in order to minimizethe risk and severity of injury in the eventof a collision or rollover.




49

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the SRS airbag

warning light is connected with the seattrack position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundai

dealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

AIR

BAG

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track posi-tion sensor and cause the airbag todeploy at a different level than shouldbe provided.

o Do not place any objects underneaththe front seats as they could damagethe seat track position sensor or in-terfere with the occupant classifica-tion system.

o Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the frontseat. These may cause a malfunctionof the seat track position sensor.

o If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer As-sistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the label provided on the re-verse of the sun visor.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protectionin frontal crashes. Front airbags arenot intended to deploy in collisions inwhich sufficient protection can be pro-vided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.




51

! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as prac-

tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Youand your passengers should neversit or lean unnecessarily close to theairbags. Improperly positioned driv-ers and passengers can be severelyinjured by inflating airbags.

o No objects should be placed over ornear the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to cause the

airbags to deploy.o If the airbags deploy, they must be

replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOTinflate again and will provide no pro-tection in subsequent collisions.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of theSRS system. Doing so could result ininjury, due to accidental deployment

of the airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the front seat.The infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o Children younger than 13 years mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to ridein the front passenger seat. If a childover 13 must be seated in the frontseat, he or she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as farback as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants in-cluding the driver should always weartheir seat belts whether or not anairbag is also provided at their seat-ing position to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event ofa crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the airbag while thevehicle is in motion.

! WARNING: !o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should sit up-right with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cush-ion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor until the vehicle is parked andthe ignition key is removed.

o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection in acrash. If an occupant is out of positionbecause of not wearing a seat belt, theairbag may forcefully contact the oc-cupant causing serious or fatal inju-

ries.

WARNING:




52

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box.When the SRSCM detects a sufficientlysevere impact to the front of the vehicle, it

will automatically deploy the front airbags.

B240B01L

11. Side Impact Sensor12. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13. Side Impact Airbag Module14. Curtain Airbag Module

The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require front airbag de-ployment or pre-tensioner seat belt de-ployment.

The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for ap-proximately 6 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which the"AIRBAG" warning light should go out.

B240B02TG-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. PASS AIR BAG "OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor

10. Driver's and Front Passenger's SeatBelt Buckle Sensors/Buckle Pre-tensioner Assemblies

B240B02TG

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in-spect the air bag system as soon as pos-sible.o The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.o The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.o The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.




53

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.

A fully inflated airbag, in combination witha properly worn seat belt, slows the driver'sor the passenger's forward motion, reduc-ing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag imme-diately starts deflating, enabling the driverto maintain forward visibility and the abilityto steer or operate other controls.

B240B03L

Passenger's Front Airbag

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accessories

(drink holder, cassette/disc holder,

sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a vehiclewith a passenger's front airbag. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

o When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do notplace it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If thereis any leakage from the air freshener

onto these areas (instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), itmay damage these parts. If the liquidfrom the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with waterimmediately.

!

B240B01TG




54

B990A03TG-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-TEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant

classification system in the frontpassenger's seat.The Occupant Classification system is de-signed to detect the presence of a prop-erly-seated front passenger and deter-mine if the passenger's front airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver'sfront airbag is not affected or controlled bythe Occupant Classification system.

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. Ifthe SRS "AIRBAG" warning light doesnot illuminate, or continuously re-mains on after illuminating for about 6seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, comes on whiledriving, the SRS is not working prop-erly. If this occurs, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by yourHyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or discon-nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion key to the "LOCK" position and

remove the ignition key. Never re-move or replace the airbag relatedfuse(s) when the ignition key is in the"ON" position. Failure to heed thiswarning will cause the SRS "AIRBAG"warning light to illuminate.

WARNING:

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, there may be a

loud noise followed by a fine dust

released in the vehicle. These condi-tions are normal and are not hazard-ous - the airbags are packed in thisfine powder. The dust generated dur-ing airbag deployment may cause skinor eye irritation as well as aggravateasthma for some persons. Alwayswash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly with lukewarm water and amild soap after an accident in whichthe airbags were deployed.

OTG030113




56

- NEVER excessively recline the frontpassenger seatback.

- NEVER sit with hips shifted towardsthe front of the seat.

B990A03O

B990A02O

- NEVER put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seat.

B990A08O

! WARNING:o Riding in an improper position or plac-

ing weight on the front passenger'sseat when it is unoccupied by a pas-senger adversely affects the occu-pant classification system (OCS).

When an adult is seated in the front pas-senger seat, if the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"indicator is on, turn the ignition key to"LOCK" and ask the passenger to sit prop-erly (sitting upright with the seat back in an

upright position, centered on the seat cush-ion with their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor). Re-start the engine and have the person re-main in that position for about 30 seconds.This will allow the system to detect theperson and to enable the passenger airbag.If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is stillon, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and askthe passenger to sit properly and restartthe engine again. If the PASS AIR BAG"OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passen-ger to move to the rear seat.

Proper seating position

B990A01O

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI




57

- NEVER lean on the door or centerconsole.

- NEVER sit on one side of the frontpassenger seat.

B990A07O

B990A05O

- NEVER place feet on the dashboard.

! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not

seated correctly (for example: seatexcessively reclined, leaning on thedoor or center console, or hips shiftedforward in the seat) can cause a con-dition where the advanced frontalairbag system senses less weightthan if the occupant were seated prop-erly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and theirfeet on the floor). This condition canresult in an adult potentially beingmisclassified and illumination of the

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator.o Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the PASSAIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illumi-nated, because the airbag will notdeploy in the event of a crash. If thePASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator re-mains illuminated after the passen-ger repositions themselves properlyand the car is restarted, Hyundai rec-

ommends that passenger move tothe rear seat because thepassenger's front airbag will not de-ploy.

!

NOTE:The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator illu-minates for about 4 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion or after the engine is started. If thefront passenger seat is occupied, the

occupant classification sensor will thenclassify the front passenger within ap-proximately 8 seconds after the ignitionis turned on.

o The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicatorwill not change according to the occu-pants posture after the vehicle hasbeen running for 30 seconds. Frontseat passengers must stay properly

seated to avoid serious injury from adeploying airbag.

WARNING:

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI




58

! WARNING:o If you change the weight on the front

passenger seat, the PASS AIR BAG"OFF" indicator may be turned on oroff for a few seconds, disabling orenabling the passenger airbags.

o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket or after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This can ad-versely affect the occupant classifi-cation system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such astools when occupying the front pas-senger seat. This can adversely af-

fect the occupant classification sys-tem.o Do not use accessory seat covers on

the front seats.o Airbags can only be used once – have

an authorized Hyundai dealer replacethe airbag immediately after deploy-ment.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupation classificationsystem, never install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger's seat.A deploying airbag can forcefully

strike a child resulting in serious inju-ries or death. Any child under 13years of age should ride in the rearseat. Children too large for child re-straints should use the available lap/ shoulder belts. No matter what typeof crash, children of all ages are saferwhen restrained in the rear seat.

o If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicatoris illuminated when the front

passenger's seat is occupied by anadult sitting properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright posi-tion, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and their feet on thefloor), have that person sit in the rearseat.

! WARNING:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because thepassenger's front airbag is connected

with the occupant classification system.If there is a malfunction of the occupantclassification system, the PASS AIRBAG "OFF" indicator will illuminate andthe passenger's front airbag will not in-flate in frontal impact crashes even ifthere is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warn-ing light does not illuminate when theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-

tion, remains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system and the SRS airbag systemas soon as possible.



1 U SO OU U

60

!o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not place any objects over the

airbag or between the airbag and your-self.

o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door andthe front seat. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental sideimpact airbag inflates.

o To prevent unexpected deploymentof the side impact airbag that mayresult in personal injury, avoid impactto the side impact sensor when the

ignition key is on.

WARNING:

B990C01JM-AAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.

They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants and therear outboard seat occupants in certainside impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to de-ploy only during certain side impact colli-sions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and impact. The curtainairbags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from the

front or rear of the vehicle or in most rolloversituations.

HLZ2051

Curtain AirbagWARNING:

o The side impact airbag is supplemen-tal to the driver's and the passenger'sseat belt systems and is not a substi-tute for them. Therefore your seatbelts must be worn at all times while

the vehicle is in motion. The airbagsdeploy only in certain side impactconditions severe enough to causesignificant injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

o For best protection from the side im-pact airbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side impactairbag, occupants should sit in anupright position with the seat belt prop-

erly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steeringwheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions.The passenger's arms and handsshould be placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat cov-ers.Use of seat covers could reduce orprevent the effectiveness of the sys-tem.

!




161

! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints , al-

ways refer to the "Child RestraintSystem" section to ensure correctinstallation and occupant protectionis maximized.

Important Safety Notes for CurtainAirbag Systems

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

!! WARNING:

o Make sure that the occupant does nothave any body parts (head, arms &legs) protruding outside the restrain-ing system. If an inflating airbag wasto strike an infant child on the head, it

may cause serious injury.o Ensure the opening for the Curtain

Airbag System remains unobstructedat all times, so that the airbags caninflate properly if needed.

o The built in coat hooks should only beused for light weight clothing. Ensurethat clothing pockets are free of anyheavy or sharp objects. When usingcoat hooks, do not hang clothes on

coat hangers.o The space between the occupant andthe curtain airbag must never be oc-cupied by children, passengers orpets. Occupants should never leanout or have any parts of their bodyprotruding from the window while theengine is running.

o Do not move the sun visor out to coverthe side window if there is an itemattached to it such as garage doorremote control, pens, compact discpocket, air fresheners or the like.

These objects may cause injury if theCurtain Airbag is deployed.

o Where sun blinds are fitted to the reardoors, these must not obstruct orimpair the airbag in any way.

o Do not install any accessories orchildren’s toys in the Curtain Airbagdeployment zones, as this may im-pair the operation of the system orthrow parts of them into the vehicle

cabin causing injury to occupants ifthe system is deployed.o To maintain the integrity of the Cur-

tain Airbag system, any work, removalor installation of the airbag and asso-ciated components (such as roof lin-ing and side trims) should always beperformed by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:! WARNING:Do not allow the passengers to lean theirheads or bodies onto doors, put theirarms on the doors, stretch their armsout of the window, or place objects be-tween the doors and passengers when

they are seated on seats equipped withside and/or curtain air bags.



64 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A02TG-AAT

OTG040842N

Conventional Type




65

1. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)2. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light3. Charging System Warning Light4. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light5. Tachometer6. Turn Signal Indicator Lights7. High Beam Indicator Light8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights

(If Installed)9. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light10. CRUISE Indicator Light11. Front Fog Lamp Indicator Light

12. Cruise SET Indicator Light13.Speedometer14. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

15. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

16. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)17. Immobilizer Warning Light18. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Indicator

(If Installed)19. Coolant Temperature Gauge20. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)21. Door Ajar Warning Light22. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)23. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light24. Odometer/Trip Computer25. ECO Indicator (If Installed)26. Low Fuel Warning Light27. Fuel Gauge




66

B260B03TG-AAT

OTG040812

Super - Vision Type




67

1. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)2. Charging System Warning Light3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light4. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light5. Tachometer6. Door Ajar Warning Light7. Turn Signal Indicator Lights8. Odometer/Trip Computer/Warning Text Display9. Speedometer10. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light11. CRUISE Indicator Light12. Cruise SET Indicator Light

13. Immobilizer Warning Light14. Coolant Temperature Gauge15. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

16. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

17. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights(If Installed)

19. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)20. High Beam Indicator Light21. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light22. Front Fog Lamp Indicator Light23. ECO Indicator (If Installed)24. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)25. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Indicator

(If Installed)26. Low Fuel Warning Light27.Fuel Gauge




68 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instru-ment panel show the direction indicatedby the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidly thannormal, or does not illuminate at all, amalfunction in the turn signal system isindicated. Your dealer should be consultedfor repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes onwhenever the headlights are switched to

the high beam or flash position.

B260G01TG-AAT

Low Oil Pressure WarningLight

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stayson while the engine is running, serious

engine damage may result. The oil pres-sure warning light comes on wheneverthere is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-mal operation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If the oilpressure warning light stays on whilethe engine is running, there is a seriousmalfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as

it is safe to do so, turn off the engine andcheck the oil level. If the oil level is low,fill the engine oil to the proper level andstart the engine again. If the light stayson with the engine running, turn the en-gine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when theengine is running, the engine should bechecked by a Hyundai dealer before thecar is driven again.

!

If your vehicle is equipped with the super-vision type cluster, the warning text is dis-played above the odometer. The warningtext comes on for about 20 seconds. If youpush the RESET button behind the steer-

ing wheel, the warning text will go out.

B260G02TG-A




69

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low BrakeFluid Level Warning Light

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-di-agonal braking system. This means youstill have braking on two wheels even ifone of the brake circuits is damaged ormalfunctions. With only one of the circuitsworking, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required tostop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion of thebrake system working. If the brakes failwhile you are driving, shift to a lower gearfor additional engine braking and stop thecar as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as

soon as possible. Driving your car witha problem in either the brake electricalsystem or brake hydraulic system isdangerous, and could result in a seriousinjury or death.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/brake fluid level warn-ing light should come on when the parkingbrake is applied and the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START". After the engineis started, the light should go out when theparking brake is released.If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START",then go out when the engine starts. If thelight comes on at any other time, you shouldslow the vehicle and bring it to a completestop in a safe location off the roadway.The brake fluid level warning light indi-cates that the brake fluid level in the brakemaster cylinder is low and hydraulic brakefluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 speci-

fications should be added. After addingfluid, if no other trouble is found, the carshould be immediately and carefully drivento a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If furthertrouble is experienced, the vehicle shouldnot be driven at all but taken to a dealer bya professional towing service.



71

B260K01TG-AAT

Trunk Lid Open WarningLight

This light remains on unless the trunk lid iscompletely closed and latched.

B260K02TG-A

If your vehicle is equipped with the super-vision type cluster, the warning text is dis-played above the odometer. The warningtext comes on for about 20 seconds. If youpush the RESET button behind the steer-ing wheel, the warning text will go out.

B260M01TG-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes onwhen the fuel tank is approaching empty.When it comes on, you should add fuel assoon as possible. Driving with the fuellevel warning light on or with the fuel level

below "E" can cause the engine to misfireand damage the catalytic converter.

B260M02TG-A



B260S01TG-AAT

Low Windshield WasherFluid Level Warning Light

The low windshield washer fluid warninglight comes on when the washer fluid res-ervoir is approaching empty. When itcomes on, add washer fluid at your earliestopportunity.

B260S02TG-A





72

NOTE:o You can find the front passenger's

seat belt warning light on the centerfascia panel.

o Although the front passenger seat isnot occupied, the seat belt warninglight will blink for 6 seconds.

o The seat belt warning light can blink

when luggage is placed on the frontpassenger seat.

The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

B265E01TG-AAT

Seat Belt Warning Lightand Chime (Driver's Side)

*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withinterval 24 seconds. If the driver's seatbelt is buckled, the light will stop within6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-ately.

*2) The light will stop within 6 seconds andchime will stop immediately.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound

Unbuckled

Buckled

Buckled→→→→→ Unbuckled

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

↓Below 3mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds

6 seconds

6 seconds *1)

↓

Stop *2)

6 seconds None

The front passenger's seat belt warninglight will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Seat Belt Warning Light(Front Passenger's Side)

*1) The seat belt warning light will go off if

the vehicle speed decreases below 3mph (5 km/h). And if the vehicle speedincreases above 3 mph (5 km/h), thewarning light will blink again.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink

Unbuckled

Buckled

6 seconds

Continuously

6 seconds

Continuously *1)

None

UnbuckledAbove 6mph

(10 km/h)

Buckled→→→→→

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

Below 6mph(10 km/h)




73

B260N01TG-AAT

Check Engine - MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL)

This light illuminates when there is a mal-function of an exhaust gas related compo-nent and the system is not functioningproperly. This light will also illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON" position,and will go out in a few seconds after the

engine is started. If it illuminates while driv-ing, or does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, take yourcar to your nearest authorized Hyundaidealer and have the system checked.

B260A01Y-GAT

Front Fog Lamp IndicatorLight

This fog indicator light comes on when theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionand the front fog light switch is on.

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS warning light comes on for ap-proximately 6 seconds after the key isturned to the "ON" position or after theengine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS isnot working properly. If the AIRBAG warn-ing light does not come on, or continuouslyremains on after operating for about 6seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have theSRS inspected by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

B260P01TG-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position,the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on whiledriving, or does not come on when the key

is turned to the "ON" position, this indicatesthat there may be a malfunction with theABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible. The normal braking system will stillbe operational, but without the assistanceof the anti-lock brake system.

! WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/ Brake fluid level warning lights remain"ON" or come on while driving, theremay be a problem with E.B.D. (ElectronicBrake Force Distribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.


74



74

B260Q02NF-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light

The cruise indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruise con-trol ON/OFF button on the steering wheelis pulled.The indicator light turns off when the cruise

control ON/OFF button is pulled again.Information about the use of cruise controlbegins on page 1-125.

B260R01TG-GAT

Cruise SET Indicator Light

The Cruise SET indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol "− /SET" or "RES/+" switch ispushed. The Cruise SET indicator lightdoes not illuminate when the cruise con-trol "CANCEL" switch is pushed or thesystem is disengaged. To disengage thecruise control system, refer to "To cancelthe cruise speed" on page 1-126.

B265C01NF-AAT

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Lights(If Installed)

The electronic stability control indicatorschange operation according to the ignitionswitch position and whether the system isin operation.They will illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, but should goout after three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-OFF indicator stays on, take your car toyour authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked. See section 2 formore information about the ESC.



B260P02TG-A


75



75

B260W01TG-AAT

Low Tire Pressure Telltale(If Installed)

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. This warning light willilluminate if one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. You should stop

and check your tires as soon as possible.If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing, reduce vehicle speed immediatelyand stop the vehicle.Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting atthe steering wheel. Inflate the tires to theproper pressure as indicated on thevehicle's tire information placard.

! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contributeto loss of vehicle control and increasedbraking distances.Continued driving on low pressure tires

will cause the tires to overheat and fail.



B260W01TG


76



76

!B265W01TG-AAT

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-toring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. If the warning light doesnot come on, or continuously remains onafter comming on for about 3 secondswhen you turned the ignition key to the"ON" position, the Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System is not working porperly. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible.The warning light also comes on and stayson when there is a problem with the TirePressure Monitoring System.

If this happens, the system may not monitorthe tire pressure. Have the system checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severe

and sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-mediately take your foot off the accel-erator, apply the brakes gradually andwith light force, and slowly move to asafe position off the road.


B265W01TG


77



77

B260U01TB-AAT

Immobilizer Warning Light

This indicator light comes on for a fewseconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position. At this time, you can startthe engine. The light goes out after theengine is running. In case this light goes

out before you start the engine, you mustturn to the "LOCK" position and restart theengine. In case this light blinks for fiveseconds when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, this indicates that theimmobilizer system is out of order. At thistime, refer to the explanation of the "LimpHome" mode and related procedures (Seepage 1-6) or consult your Hyundai dealer.

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads havewear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise whennew pads are needed. The sound maycome and go or be heard all the time whenthe vehicle is moving. It may also be heard

when the brake pedal is pushed downfirmly. Excessive rotor damage will resultif the worn pads are not replaced. See yourHyundai dealer immediately.

D150340AMC-EU

ECO Indicator (If Installed)

The ECO indicator is displayed to help youimprove fuel efficiency when you are driv-ing.o The ECO indicator (green) will turn on

when you drive economically in the

ECO ON mode. If you don't want theindicator displayed, you can turn theECO ON mode to OFF mode by press-ing the MODE button.

o The indicator will turn off when the sys-tem is not working properly in the ECOON mode.

o The fuel efficiency depends on thedriver's driving habit and road condi-tion.

o The ECO indicator does not function inP (Park), N (Neutral), R (Reverse) orsports mode.

ECO

! WARNING:Don't keep watching the indicator whiledriving. It will distract you and cause anaccident that results in severe personalinjury.

PARKING BRAKE WARNING CHIME(If Installed)If you drive above 6 mph (10 km/h) with theparking brake applied, the warning chime

will sound continuously. Before driving, besure the parking brake is fully released.


78 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER



!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is un-der pressure and could erupt and causesevere burns. Wait until the engine iscool before adding coolant to the reser-

voir.

B290A02TG

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

INSTRUMENT CLUSTERB280A02TG-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank. Thefuel capacity is given in section 9.

NOTE:

The " " symbol means, the fuel filler

lid is located on the left side of the ve-hicle.

B280A02TG

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

CAUTION:Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. Ifyou run out of fuel, it could cause theengine to misfire and result in excessiveloading of the catalytic converter.

!


79



B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of

your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

OTG048839

OTG048813

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

The normal range is approximately in themiddle between "H" and "C". If it movesacross the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off theengine. Then open the hood and, after theengine has cooled, check the coolant level(See "If the engine overheats" on the page3-4.) and the water pump drive belt. If you

suspect cooling system trouble, have yourcooling system checked by a Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to sucha speed that the needle enters the redzone on the tachometer face. This cancause severe engine damage and mayvoid your warranty coverage.

!


80 TRIP COMPUTER



OTG040841

OTG048814

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

B300A02A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated

in miles per hour and kilometers per hour.

B310A01TG-AAT

ODOMETER

The odometer records the total distancetraveled in miles. You will also find theodometer useful to determine when peri-odic maintenance should be performed.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the mileage registered on the

odometer. The alteration may void yourwarranty coverage.

B310A02TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

Odometer

Odometer

B400B02TG-AAT

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to driving, suchas estimated tripmeter, distance to empty,average speed, drive time, average fuelconsumption and instant fuel consump-tion on the LCD.

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with the con-

ventional type cluster, the unit is dis-played only in the average speed, aver-age fuel consumption and instant fuelconsumption.

B400B11TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


81



Pushing in the MODE switch when theignition switch is in "ON" position changesthe display as follows;

B400B02TG

MODE SWITCH RESET SWITCH

Push in the RESET switch for more than 1second to initialize the displayed informa-tion such as tripmeter, average speed,drive time, average fuel consumption, in-stant fuel consumption, and to toggle theECO Light ON or OFF.

B400B03TG

TRIPMETER

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION

ECO ON/OFF MODE


82



2. Distance to Empty

o This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty from the current fuellevel in the fuel tank.

o The trip computer may not register ad-ditional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

B400B13TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

1. Tripmeter

o This mode indicates the total distancetravelled since the last tripmeter reset.Total distance is also reset to zero if thebattery is disconnected.

o Pressing the RESET switch for morethan 1 second when the tripmeter isbeing displayed clears the tripmeter tozero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to

999.9 miles.

B400B12TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press theMODE switch.

TRIP A: Distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a firstdestination.

TRIP B: Distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.

OTG040721

Conventional Type

OTG040710N

Super - Vision Type




84



5. Average Fuel Consumption

o This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel usedand the distance since the last averageconsumption reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from thefuel consumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero if the battery is disconnected.

B400B17TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

o To reset the average fuel consumptionto zero (--), press the RESET switch formore than 1 second.

o If the fuel is refilled more than 1.36gallons (6 liters), it will be reset auto-matically.

o When you drive 0.03 mile (50 m) andless after resetting, the average fuelconsumption will be displayed as '--'.

4. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the total time fromthe starting of the engine to the ignitionkey "OFF" after resetting. When theRESET switch is pushed, it will be ini-tialized to '0:00'.

o If the ignition switch is turned to OFF formore than 2 hours, it will be reset auto-matically.

o The drive time will cycle to '0:00' afterreaching '99:59'.

B400B16TG-A

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


85

f CO



6. Instant Fuel Consumption(If Installed)

This mode calculates the instant fuel con-sumption every 2 seconds (supervisiontype : every 0.2 second) from the drivingdistance and quantity of fuel injection.

OTG040709N

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type

7. ECO ON/OFF Mode (If Installed)

You can turn the ECO indicator on/off onthe instrument cluster in this mode.

If you push the RESET button more than 1second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF isdisplayed and the ECO indicator ( )turns off.

ECO

ECO

If you want to display the ECO indicator( ) again, press the RESET buttonmore than 1 second in the ECO OFFmode and then ECO ON mode is dis-played.For more detailed explanations, refer to"Warnings and indicator lights" in sec-tion 1.

OTG040717K

OTG040316L

Conventional Type

Super - Vision Type


86

B340B01A AAT B340C05A AAT

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A AAT



B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to a point where it beginsflashing.The lever will automatically return to the

center position when released.

B340C05A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrelon the end of the multi-function switch. Thefirst position turns on the parking lights,sidelights, tail lights and instrument panel

lights. The second position turns on theheadlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

OTG040800 OTG040801

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upwards on the lever causes the

turn signals on the right side of the car toblink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the center posi-tion and turn off the turn signals at the sametime. If either turn signal indicator lightblinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all,there is a malfunction in the system. Checkfor a burned-out fuse or bulb or see yourHyundai dealer.

One-touch triple turn signal(If Installed)To activate a one-touch triple turn signalmove the turn signal lever slightly for lessthan 1.8 seconds and then release it. Thelane change signals will blink 3 times.


87

B340G01LZ-AATBatterySaverFunction HeadlightEscortFunction



B340G01LZ AAT

Auto Light

OTG040802

To operate the automatic light feature, turnthe barrel on the end of the multi-functionswitch. If you set the multi-function switchto "AUTO", the tail lights and headlights

will be turned automatically on or off ac-cording to external illumination conditions.

NOTE:Turn the lights manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

Battery Saver Function

o The purpose of this feature is to preventthe battery from being discharged. Thesystem automatically turns off the park-ing lights when the driver removes theignition key and opens the driver-sidedoor (in that order).

o With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights on whenthe ignition key is removed, perform thefollowing :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

Headlight Escort Function(If Installed)

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC orOFF position with the headlights ON, theheadlights (and/or tail lights) remain on forabout 20 minutes. However, if the driver’sdoor is opened and closed, the headlightsare turned off after 30 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by press-ing the lock button on the transmitter twiceor turning off the light switch from the head-light or Auto light position.

CAUTION:If the driver gets out of the vehicle throughother doors (except driver's door), thebattery saver function does not operateand the headlight escort function doesnot turn off automatically. Therefore, itcauses the battery to be discharged. Inthis case, make sure to turn off the lampbefore getting out of the vehicle.

!


88

B340E01A-AATB340D01A-AAT



3 0 0

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. The head-lights can be flashed even though theheadlight switch is in the "OFF" position.

OTG040804

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, pushthe lever forward (away from you). TheHigh Beam Indicator Light will come on atthe same time. For low beams, pull the

lever back toward you.

OTG040803NOTE:o Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel toensure better auto light system con-trol.

o Don't clean the sensor using a win-

dow cleaner.o If your vehicle has window tint or other

types of metallic coating on the frontwindshield, the AUTO light systemmay not work properly.

Auto lightsensor

OTG020095

! WARNING:Do not use high beam when there areother vehicles. Using high beam couldobstruct the other driver's vision.


89WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

A : Wiper speed controlWindshield Wiper/Washer

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360B01TG-AAT



B355A02TG-A

Type A

B355A03TG-A

Type B

A : Wiper speed control · MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off · INT/AUTO – Intermittent wipe or auto

control wipe · LO – Low wiper speed · HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe timeadjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

Windshield Wiper/Washer

To turn on the front fog lights, place theswitch in the "ON" position. They will lightwhen the headlight switch is in the secondposition.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,the fog lights will be turned off.

OTG040805


90

B350B02TG-GAT

A t Wi O tiB350A01TG-AAT

Wi d hi ldWi



!

B350A03TG-ARain Sensor

Auto Wiper Operation(If Installed)

When the windshield wiper switch is placedin the "AUTO" position, the rain sensorlocated on the upper end of windshield

glass senses the amount of rainfall andcontrols for the appropriate length of theintervals between wipes appropriately.

B350A07TG-A

NOTE:o Set the wiper switch to “OFF” position

when the wiper is not in use.o If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield glass, thereshould be a 10 minute waiting period

prior to the operation of the wind-shield wipers.

WARNING:When the ignition switch is on and thewindshield wiper switch is placed in the"AUTO" mode, please use caution in the

following cases to avoid any hand injury:As the wiper system may automaticallyactivate, the fingers or hand might becaught in the wiper.

o Do not touch the upper end of thewindshield glass facing the rain sen-sor.

o Do not wipe the upper end of the wind-shield glass with a cloth.

o Do not put pressure on the windshield

glass.

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

A)Intermittent wiper operation

B)Low-speed operationC)High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removed manu-ally. If there is only a light layer of snowor ice, operate the heater in the defrostmode to melt the snow or ice beforeusing the wiper.

B350A06TG-A

(A)

(B)

(C)

Windshield Wiper


91

B350B01O-GAT

WindshieldWasherOperationMist Wiper Operation B350C01O-AAT

AdjustableIntermittentWiperOpera



Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel. When the washer lever is operated,the wipers automatically make two passes

across the windshield. The washer contin-ues to operate until the lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than

15 seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to theglass prior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in win-ter, use windshield washer antifreeze.

B350B05TG-A

p p

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist,push the windshield wiper and washercontrol lever upwards.

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Opera-tion

To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the interval be-

tween wipes can be varied from approxi-mately 1 to 18 seconds by turning theinterval adjuster barrel.

B350B06TG-A

B350C03TG-A


92 FRONT/REAR WINDOWDEFROSTER SWITCH

B380A02HP-AAT

(If Installed)!

HAZARD WARNING SYS-

TEMB370A01A-AAT



B380A02TG-A

(If Installed)

The front/rear window defroster is turnedon by pushing in on the switch. At the sametime, the front/rear window defroster indi-cator light on the switch is turned on. To

turn the defroster off, push in on the switcha second time. The front/rear window de-froster automatically turns itself off afterabout 20 minutes. To restart the defrostercycle, push in on the switch again after ithas turned itself off.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the front/ rear window glass with an abrasive typeof glass cleaner or use a scraper toremove the foreign deposits from theinner surface of the glass as this maycause damage to the defroster elements.

!

NOTE:The engine must be running for the front/ rear window defroster to operate.The hazard warning system should be

used whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location. Whenyou must make such an emergency stop,always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causesall turn signal lights to blink. The hazardwarning lights will operate even thoughthe key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, pushthe switch a second time.

B370A01TG


93DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01TG-GAT

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT

CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)B410A01A-AAT

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A03A-AAT



There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.

M - Push "M" to advance the minute indi-

cated.R - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to

facilitate resetting the clock to thecorrect time. When this is done:Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11: 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11: 59 changes the readout to 12 : 00.Push the "R" button for 4 seconds todisplay a 12 or 24-hour clock.

OTG040502

The instrument panel lights can be madebrighter or dimmer by turning the instru-ment panel light control knob.

B410A01TG-A

For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all theway into its socket. When the element has

heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready"position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.This can damage the heating element andcreate a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine Hyundai re-placement or its approved equivalent.

OTG040840


94 ASHTRAY

B430A01TG-GAT

!

POWER OUTLETS

B500D01TG-AAT

Front Rear (If installed)



The front ashtray may be opened by push-ing and releasing the ashtray lid. To cleanashtray, the plastic receptacle should beremoved, by lifting the plastic ash recep-tacle upward and pulling it out.

! CAUTION:o Use the power outlets only when the

engine is running. Remove the plugfrom the power outlet after using theelectric device. Using the power out-lets when the engine stops or keepingthe electric device plugged in for many

hours may cause the battery to dis-charge.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipmentthat are not designed to operate on 12volts.

o Some electronic devices can causeelectronic interference when pluggedinto the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noise

and malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices in your vehicle.

These supply 12V electric power to oper-ate electric accessories or equipment.

B500D01TGB430A01TG

Front Rear (If installed)


95

B450B01NF-AAT

Rear Drink Holder!

DRINK HOLDER

B450A01LZ-GAT

Front Drink Holder



! CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed posi-tion when not in use.

HTG2184

The rear drink holder for holding cups orcans is located in the center of the rear seatarmrest.

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed posi-tion when not in use.

!

HTG2183

The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans. The drinkholder can be opened by pushing at its topedge.

! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passen-gers. Spilled liquids can damage inte-rior trim and electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. The ob-jects can be thrown out in the event ofa sudden stop or an accident, possi-bly injuring the passengers in the

vehicle.

To close the drink holder lidPush down the lid until it locks into placeafter the lid has completely opened.The lid closes only when the lid has beencompletely opened.

! WARNING:Keep cans or bottles out of direct sunlight and do not put them in a vehicle thatis heated up. It may explode.


96

!

SEATBACK POCKET

B540B01E-AAT

SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)



! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is veryhot can injure you or your passen-gers. Spilled liquids can damage inte-rior trim and electrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups

or cans in the drink holder. Theseobjects can be thrown out in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident, pos-sibly injuring the passengers in thevehicle.

HTG2042

The seatback pockets for holding papersare located on the backside of the frontseats.

!

Sun Shade

B460A01TG

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or to

block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driv-ing. This could result in loss of controland an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.


97

Auto reverseB460B02TG-GAT

Opening the Sunroof SystemAuto slide open



!

If an object or part of the body is detectedwhile the sunroof is closing automatically,it will reverse direction, and then stop.Auto reverse function does not work if asmall obstacle is blocked between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash. Youshould always check that all passengers

and objects are away from the sunroofbefore closing it.

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, handsor body are not trapped by a closingsunroof.

Manual slide close

Press the CLOSE button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.

OTG029027N

To use the auto slide feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console.The sunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point, pressany sunroof control button.

Manual slide openPress the SLIDE OPEN button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

Auto slide close

To close the sunroof, press the CLOSEbutton on the overhead console for morethan 1 second.The sunroof will slide all the way close. To

stop at the desired point, press any sunroofcontrol button.


98

B460C02TG-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System!

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the overhead



Auto tilt open

To use the auto tilt feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the TILT UP

button on the overhead console. Thesunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.

!Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the CLOSEbutton on the overhead console and holdit until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.

OTG029027N

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's

hands, arms or body are between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash, asthis could result in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out ofthe sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other partsof the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise, youcould be seriously injured if the ve-hicle stops suddenly or if the vehicleis involved in an accident.




100

B490A01TG-AAT

Interior LightB485A01TG-GAT

Rear Map Light

INTERIOR LIGHT

! WARNING:



The interior courtesy light has two buttons.The two buttons are:

o DOOR

In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened regardless of the ignition key po-sition. The light goes out gradually after 30seconds if the door is closed. However ifthe ignition switch is ON or all doors arelocked, the interior light will turn off evenwithin 30 seconds.

B490A01TG

Push in the map light switch to turn the lighton or off. This light produces a spot beamfor convenient use as a map light at nightor as a personal light for rear passengers.

B485A01TG

B480B01TG-AAT

Front Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the lighton or off. This light produces a spot beamfor convenient use as a map light at nightor as a personal light for the driver and thepassenger.

OTG029113

Without sunroof

With sunroof

! WARNING:Do not use the interior lights when driv-ing in the dark. Accidents could happenbecause the view may be obscured byinterior lights.


101

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all

SUNGLASS HOLDER

!B491A03O-AAT

WARNING:



CAUTION:Do not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the ve-

hicle is not running.

!

times.

The sunglass holder is located on the frontoverhead console. Push the end of thecover to open the sunglass holder.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holder inthe event of a sudden stop or an acci-dent, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blockedby an open sunglass holder.

OTG029182N


102

B500A01TG-AAT

ACCESSORY BOX

STORAGE BOX

B500A01TG-AAT

GLOVE BOX



The accessory box may be opened bypushing the knob downward.It is used for storing small articles.

OTG040843L

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automaticallyturn on the light when the multi-functionswitch is turned to the first position.

NOTE:Information about use of the trunk lidcontrol button located in the glove box islocated in the trunk lid section.

B541A01TG

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, theglove box door should be kept closedwhen the car is in motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glovebox release lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with a master key.

HTG2178

CAUTION:Do not keep food in the glove box for along time.

!


103

The center console box is used for storingcassette tapes or small articles.To use the center console box, pull up the

B505A01NF-GAT

CENTER CONSOLE BOX

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR-

RORB510B01TG-AAT



! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in caseof an accident or a sudden stop, thecenter console box lid should be keptclosed when the car is in motion.

, p phandle and lift the lid as shown.

HTG2179

HTG2179-1

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted to your preferred rear vision, bothdirectly behind the vehicle, and to the rearof the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearview mir-ror switch controls the adjustments for bothright and left outside mirrors.

NOTE:Before driving away, always check thatyour mirrors are positioned so you cansee behind you, both to the left and rightsides, as well as directly behind yourvehicle.

OTG040828L


104

CAUTION:!CAUTION:

To adjust the position of either mir-ror:!



!

o Do not operate the switch continu-ously for an unnecessary length oftime.

o Scraping ice from the mirror face couldcause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or

approved de-icer.

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface, and anyobjects seen in this mirror are closer

than they appear.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do notadjust the mirror by force. Use an ap-proved spray de-icer (not radiator anti-freeze) to release the frozen mecha-nism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

1. Move the selecting switch to the right orleft to activate the adjustable mecha-nism for the corresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate perimeter switch as illus-trated.

B510B02TG


105

B510C01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS (Manual Type)

B510D02HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORHEATER (If Installed) CAUTION:

!



To fold the outside rearview mirrors, pushthem towards the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be folded

rearward for parking in narrow areas.

OTG040008

The outside rearview mirror heater is actu-ated in connection with the front/rear win-dow defroster. To heat the outside rear-

view mirror glass, push in the switch for thefront/rear window defroster. The rearviewmirror glass will be heated for defrosting ordefogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions.Push the switch again to turn the heater off.The outside rearview mirror heater auto-matically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

B380A02TG-A

!WARNING:

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, serious injuryor property damage.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do notadjust the mirror by force. Use an ap-proved spray de-icer (not radiator anti-freeze) to release the frozen mecha-nism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.


106

B510E01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS (Electric Type) (If Installed) CAUTION:

If th i i j d ith i d t

!

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-

VIEW MIRRORB520A01A-AAT

(If Installed)



!Both left and right outside rearview mirrorscan be folded by pressing the outsiderearview mirror folding switch. The outside

rearview mirrors can be folded rearwardfor parking in narrow areas.

OTG040827L

o If the mirror is jammed with ice, do notadjust the mirror by force. Use anapproved spray de-icer (not radiatorantifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

o Do not attempt to fold the electricoutside rearview mirrors manually.If the mirrors are not completely foldedout, the mirrors may vibrate.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control, and anaccident which could cause death, seri-ous injury or property damage.

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/nightinside rearview mirror. The "night" positionis selected by flipping the tab at the bottomof the mirror toward you. In the "night"position, the glare of headlights of carsbehind you is reduced.

OTG040501

!WARNING:

Do not modify the inside mirror and donot install a wide mirror. It could result ininjury, during an accident or deploymentof the air bag.


107HOMELINK MIRROR

B520C01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

Automatic Dimming Mirror



Automatic-Dimming Mirrorwith Z-Nav™ Electronic CompassDisplay and HomeLink ®

Your vehicle comes with a Gentex Auto-matic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Elec-

tronic Compass Display and an IntegratedHomeLink ® Wireless Control System. Dur-ing nighttime driving, this feature will auto-matically detect and reduce rearview mir-ror glare while the compass indicates thedirection the vehicle is pointed. TheHomeLink ® Universal Transceiver allowsyou to activate your garage door(s), elec-tric gate, home lighting, etc.

1. Channel 1 Button2. Channel 2 Button3. Status Indicator LED4. Channel 3 Button

5. Rear Light Sensor6. Dimming On/Off Button7. Compass Control Button8. Display

OTG029200N


108

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS ® ) Mirror

The NVS ® Mirror in your vehicle is the most

Automatic-Dimming Function

Your mirror will automatically dim upondetecting glare from the vehicles traveling

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is alsoequipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that



The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is the mostadvanced way to reduce annoying glare inthe rearview mirror during any driving situ-ation. For more information regardingNVS ® mirrors and other applications,please refer to the Gentex website:

www.gentex.com.

CAUTION:The NVS ® Mirror automatically reducesglare during driving conditions basedupon light levels monitored in front of thevehicle and from the rear of the vehicle.These light sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object that would ob-struct either light sensor will degradethe automatic dimming control feature.

!

behind you. The auto-dimming functioncan be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFFButton:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indi-

cated by the green Status Indicator LEDturning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns theauto-dimming function ON which is in-dicated by the green Status IndicatorLED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

Compass Function

The Compass can be turned ON and OFFand will remember the last state when theignition is cycled. To turn the displayfeature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to turn

the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button again

to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with pressand hold sequences of the button andare detailed below.

There is a difference between magneticnorth and true north. The compass in themirror can compensate for this differencewhen it knows the Magnetic Zone in whichit is operating. This is set either by thedealer or by the user. The operating ZoneNumbers for North America are shown inthe figure on the following section.

q pp pshows the vehicle Compass heading inthe Display Window using the 8 basiccardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).


109

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location on theZone Map



Zone Map.2. Press and hold the button for more

than 3 but less than 6 seconds, thecurrent Zone Number will appear on thedisplay.

3. Pressing and holding the button

again will cause the numbers to incre-ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button whenthe desired Zone Number appears onthe display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compasswill start displaying a compass headingagain.

There are some conditions that can cause

changes to the vehicle magnets. Itemssuch as installing a ski rack or a CB an-tenna or even some body repair work onthe vehicle can cause changes to thevehicle's magnetic field. In these situa-tions, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for thesechanges. To re-calibrate the compass:

B520C05NF


110

!CAUTION:

B f i H Li k® t

Programming HomeLink ®

NOTE:o When programming a garage door

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 6 seconds. When the compassmemory is cleared a "C" will appear inthe display



Integrated HomeLink ® Wireless Con-

trol System

The HomeLink ® Wireless Control Systemprovides a convenient way to replace up tothree hand-held radio-frequency (RF)transmitters with a single built-in device.This innovative feature will learn the radiofrequency codes of most current transmit-ters to operate devices such as gate op-erators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems, even home light-ing. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmedby following the outlined procedures. Ad-ditional HomeLink ® information can befound at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

Before programming HomeLink ® to agarage door opener or gate operator,make sure that people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Do not useHomeLink ® with any garage door openerthat lacks the safety stop and reversefeatures as required by U.S. federalsafety standards (this includes any ga-rage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling thedoor to stop and reverse - does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

o When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park the ve-hicle outside of the garage.

o It is recommended that a new batterybe placed in the hand-held transmit-ter of the device being programmed

to HomeLink ® for quicker training andaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

o Some vehicles may require the igni-tion switch to be turned to the second(or "accessories") position for pro-gramming and/or operation ofHomeLink.

o In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming stepslisted below, contact HomeLink ® at:www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.Retain the original transmitter of the RF

device you are programming for use inother vehicles as well as for futureHomeLink ® programming. It is also sug-gested that upon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink ® buttons beerased for security purposes.

the display.2. To calibrate the compass, drive the

vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than5 MPH (8 Km/h).




112

4. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink ® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingi l t d d i h ld

Operating HomeLink ®

To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink ® button. Activa-tion will now occur for the trained device

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink ® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingi l t d d i h ld



is complete and your device shouldactivate.

5. To program the remaining twoHomeLink ® buttons, follow either steps1 through 4 above for other Rolling

Code devices or steps 2 through 5 inStandard Programming for standarddevices.

During programming, your handheld trans-mitter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press the IntegratedHomeLink ® Wireless Control System but-ton (note steps 2 through 4 in the StandardProgramming portion of this document)while you press and re-press ("cycle") your

handheld transmitter every two secondsuntil the frequency signal has been learned.The indicator light will flash slowly andthen rapidly after several seconds uponsuccessful training.

tion will now occur for the trained device(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,security system, entry door lock, home/ office lighting, etc.). For convenience, thehand-held transmitter of the device mayalso be used at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®

Button

To program a new device to a previouslytrained HomeLink ® button, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink ®

button. Do NOT release until step 4 hasbeen completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position thehandheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches awayfrom the HomeLink ® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmit-ter button. The HomeLink ® indicator lightwill flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flashrapidly, release both buttons.

is complete and your new device shouldactivate.

Erasing HomeLink ® Buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased. How-

ever, to erase all three programmed but-tons:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink ®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink ® Wireless Con-trol System is now in the training (learn)mode and can be programmed at any time

following the appropriate steps in the Pro-gramming sections above.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3


113PARKING BRAKE

B530A04TG-AATThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1 Thisdevice maynot cause harmful inter

CAUTION:o Driving with the parking brake applied

will cause excessive brake pad and

!



Always engage the parking brake beforeleaving the vehicle. This also turns on theparking brake indicator light when the keyis in the "ON" or "START" position. Beforedriving away, be sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the indicator

light is off.

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first shift thetransmission into the park (P) position.Then depress the parking brake pedaldown as far as possible. The parking brakepedal will remain in a depressed position.

B530A01TG-A

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

will cause excessive brake pad andbrake rotor wear.

o Do not operate the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving except in anemergency situation. It could dam-

age the vehicle system and makeendanger driving safety.

NVS ® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex Corpo-ration, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink ® isa registered trademark owned by JohnsonControls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wis-consin.

! WARNING:The transceiver has been tested andcomplies with FCC and Industry Canadarules. Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the device.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, depress theparking brake pedal a second time. Theparking brake pedal will return to it's origi-nal, disengaged, position.If the parking brake pedal does not release

or dose not release all the way, have thesystem checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

NOTE:The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for proper stroke.


114 TRUNK LID

B540A01S-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release! WARNING:

Whenever leaving vehicle or parking al-ways set the parking brake as far as



!

To open the trunk lid without using the key,pull up the lid release lever (located on thedriver's door panel).To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk

lid is securely fastened, always check bytrying to pull it up again.

HTG2014

WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is inmotion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonousexhaust gases may enter the car andserious illness or death may result. See

additional warnings concerning exhaustgases on page 2-2.

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminated whenthe parking brake is applied with the igni-tion switch in the START or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains on afterthe parking brake is released while engineis running, there may be a malfunction inthe brake system. Immediate attention isnecessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehicleimmediately. If that is not possible, useextreme caution while operating the ve-hicle and only continue to drive the vehicle

until you can reach a safe location or repairshop.

W-75

ways set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Vehiclesnot fully engaged in park with the parkingbrake set are at risk for moving inadvert-

ently and injuring yourself or others.


115

When leaving the key with a parking lotattendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 3above and leave the sub key with theattendent. Sub key can start the engineand operate door locks only

B540B01TG-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch ReleaseB541A01TG-GAT

Trunk Lid Control Button



!

and operate door locks only.

Releasing

To release the trunk lock feature, open theglove box with master key and set the trunklid control button to "ON" position (de-pressed). In this position the trunk willopen with trunk lid release lever or trans-mitter. The trunk can never be opened withthe sub key.

WARNING:Doors and trunk should be kept lockedand keys be kept out of the reach of

children. Parents also should teach theirchildren about the dangers of playing intrunks. ! WARNING:

o If a person becomes locked in thetrunk, push the emergency trunk re-lease handle on the inside panel of thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o Keep cars locked and keys out of thereach of children. HYUNDAI recom-mends parents teach children about

the emergency trunk release lever intheir vehicle and how to open the trunk lid if they are accidentally locked inthe trunk.

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-thedark emergency trunk release lever locatedinside the trunk. It will glow after the trunk isclosed. Push the emergency trunk releasehandle to open the trunk from the inside.

OTG040016

The trunk lid control button located in thevehicle glove box is used to prevent unau-thorized access to the trunk.

LockingTo activate the trunk lock system so that thetrunk can only be opened with the masterkey, perform the following:

1. Open the glove box.2. Set the trunk lid control button to "OFF"

position (not depressed).3. Close the glove box and lock the glove

box with the master key.

B541A01TG


116

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when car-

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02O-AAT

(If Installed)B540C01TG-AAT

To unlock using the key



,rying fragile or bulky objects in the lug-gage compartment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.The luggage net ALWAYS keep yourface and body out of its recoil path. DONOT use when the luggage net strapshave visible signs of wear or damage.

When loading the objects in the luggagecompartment, use the four rings located inthe luggage compartment to attach theluggage net as shown illustration. This willhelp prevent the objects from sliding.

HNF2186OTG040015

To open the trunk lid, insert the key and turnit clockwise to unlock, then press the out-side handle. The trunk compartment lightilluminates when the trunk lid is opened.


117HIGH-MOUNTED REAR

STOP LIGHTB550A02Y-AAT

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID

RELEASEB560A03NF-AAT



In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the highmounted rear stop light in the center of therear window also lights when the brakesare applied.

OTG070110

! WARNING:o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Be-

fore refueling, always stop the engineand never smoke or allow sparks and

open flames near the filler area.o Never operate your vehicle without a

filler cap properly installed, flammablevapors and gasoline could leak out indangerous situations such as a colli-sion or rollover. If the filler cap mustbe replaced, only use genuine Hyundaireplacement parts.

OTG041023

The fuel-filler lid may be opened frominside the vehicle by pushing the fuel-fillerlid opener switch located on the driver'sdoor.

NOTE:

If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauseice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice andrelease the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

HTG2022


118

! WARNING:! WARNING:Read and follow all warnings postedat the gas station facility.

- If you must re-enter the vehicle, youshould once again eliminate poten-

o After refueling, make sure the fuelcap is installed securely to prevent

! WARNING:



- Before refueling, note the locationof the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.

- Before touching the fuel nozzle orfuel filler cap, you should eliminatepotentially dangerous static elec-tricity discharge by touching an-other metal part of the front of thevehicle, a safe distance away fromthe fuel filler neck, nozzle, or othergas source.

- Do not get back into a vehicle onceyou have begun refueling. Do nottouch, rub or slide against any item

or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,etc.) capable of producing staticelectricity. Static electricity dis-charge can ignite fuel vapors re-sulting in explosion.

tially dangerous static electricitydischarge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gasoline

source.- When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior to refuel-ing. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehicleshould be maintained until the fillingis complete. Use only portable fuelcontainers designed to carry and

store gasoline.- Do not use cellular phones around

a gas station or while refueling anyvehicle. Electric current and/or elec-tronic interference from cellularphones can potentially ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. If you mustuse your cellular phone use it in aplace away from the gas station.

fuel spillage in the event of an acci-dent.

o Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,otherwise the " "light will illumi-

nate.o If you open the fuel filler cap duringhigh ambient temperatures, a slight"pressure sound" may be heard. Thisis normal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-matically shuts off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/ex-plosive materials. When refueling,

please note the following guidelinescarefully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fire orexplosion.


119

! WARNING:- When refueling always shut the en-

gine off. Sparks produced by elec-t i l t l t d t th

B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01NF-GAT



trical components related to theengine can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire. Always insure that theengine is OFF before and during

refueling. Once refueling is com-plete, check to make sure the fuelfiller cap and door are securelyclosed, before starting the engine.

- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leavea lit cigarette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially during re-fueling. Automotive fuel is highlyflammable and can, when ignited,

result in explosion by flames.- If a fire breaks out during refueling,

leave the vicinity of the vehicle, andimmediately contact the managerof the gas station or contact thepolice and local fire department.Follow any safety instructions theyprovide.

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened usingthe remote opener, a manual openerhandle is located inside the trunk on the leftside. Open the fuel filler lid by pulling onthis handle as shown in the illustration.

OTG048702 1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.

B570A01TG

!WARNING:

Open the hood after turning off the en-gine on a flat surface, shifting the shiftlever to the P(Park) position and settingthe parking brake.


120 FLOOR MAT ANCHOR(S)

B571A03Y-AAT

(If Installed)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

Type A Type B



!WARNING:

o Always double check to be sure that

the hood is firmly latched before driv-ing away. If it is not latched, the hoodcould fly open while the vehicle isbeing driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in an ac-cident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision isobstructed and the hood could fall orbe damaged.

When closing the hood, slowly close thehood and make sure it locks into place.

OTG020025

2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

OTG020024

When using a floor mat on the front floorcarpet, make sure it securely attaches to thefloor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. Thiskeeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

OXM049228


121SUN VISOR

B580A01NF-AAT

!WARNING:

o Do not place the sun visor in such amanner that it obscures visibility ofthe roadway traffic or other objects

WARNING:The following must be observed wheninstalling ANY floor mat to the vehicle.o Ensure that the floor mats are se

!



Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passengereither frontal or sideward shade. To re-duce glare or to shut out direct rays of thesun, turn the sun visor down.Vanity mirrors are provided on the back of

the sun visor for the driver and front pas-senger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) label containing useful informa-tion can be found on the reverse of eachsun visor.

B580A01TG

the roadway, traffic or other objects.o Do not move the sun visor out to cover

the side window if there is an itemattended to it such as a garage door

remote control, pens, air freshenersor the like. These objects could causeinjury if the curtain airbag is deployed.

o Ensure that the floor mats are se-curely attached to the vehicle's floormat anchor(s) before driving the ve-hicle.

o Do not use ANY floor mat that cannotbe firmly attached to the vehicle'sfloor mat anchors.

o Do not stack floor mats on top of oneanother (e.g. all-weather rubber maton top of a carpeted floor mat). Only asingle floor mat should be installed ineach position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manu-factured with driver's side floor mat an-chors that are designed to securely hold

the floor mat in place. To avoid anyinterference with pedal operation,HYUNDAI recommends that only theHYUNDAI floor mat designed for use inyour vehicle be installed.

! WARNING:For your safety, do not obstruct yourvision when using the sunvisor.




123REAR SEAT ARMREST

B611A01Y-AAT

HORNDOOR COURTESY LAMP

B620A01TG-AAT B610A01L-GAT



This armrest is located in the center of therear seatback.

B611A01TG

The door courtesy lamp comes on whenthe front door is opened. The purpose ofthis light is to assist when you get in or outand also to warn passing vehicles.

B620A01TG

Press horn pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

B610A01TG


124 REAR WINDOW CURTAIN

B265C01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

STEERING WHEEL TILT &

TELESCOPICB600A01TG-GAT

Manual type ! CAUTION:After adjusting the steering wheel, trymoving it up and down to make sure it islocked in position.



OTG020265

Press the curtain switch to raise the rearwindow curtain. To lower the rear windowcurtain, press the switch once again.

NOTE:

o When the transaxle gear is shiftedinto reverse "R", the rear windowcurtain will automatically lower. Whenthe transaxle gear is shifted from "R"to "P" again or if the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph, the rear windowcurtain will automatically raise.

o Do not attempt to raise or lower therear window curtain manually.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever downward fully to un-lock.

2. Adjust upward or downward and for-

ward or backward to set the steeringwheel to the desired position.

3. After adjustment, securely tighten thelever by pulling it upward.

OTG048705

! WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury or death.


125

B660B01TG-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A03S-AAT

The cruise control system provides auto-matic speed control for your comfort whendriving on straight, open freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested highways.This system is designed to function above

B600B01TG-GAT

Electric type (If Installed)



!

1. Pull the cruise control ON/OFF switch.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the in-strument cluster will illuminate. Thisturns the system on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed

above 40 km/h (25 mph).

OTG048800

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

!

OTG048706

To adjust the desired position of the steer-ing wheel, operate the adjusting switch onthe left side of the steering wheel.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury or death.

WARNING:o Cruise control is not recommended

for city driving, winding roads, slip-pery roads, heavy rain, or other badweather conditions.

o Pay particular attention during thedown-hill driving with cruise controlsystem as the vehicle speed can in-crease gradually.




127

!WARNING:

o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switchoff when not using the cruise controlto avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

o Use the cruise control system only

B660F02TG-AAT

To Reset at a Slower SpeedB660E01TG-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RES/+" andhold it.If the control switch "RES/+" is selected,the cruise "SET" indicator in the instru-

l ill ill i



o Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, drivingin heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) orwinding roads or over 6% up-hill ordown-hill roads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the "−/−/−/−/−/SET" switch is acti-vated or reactivated after applyingthe brakes, the cruise control willenergize after approximately 3 sec-onds. This delay is normal.

1. Push the control switch "−/SET" andhold it. While the control switch ispushed, the vehicle speed will gradu-ally decrease.If the "−/SET" switch is selected, the

cruise "SET" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained,release the control switch.

OTG048801

ment cluster will illuminate.2. Accelerate to desired speed and re-

lease the control switch. While the con-

trol switch is held, the vehicle will gradu-ally gain speed.


128 AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHB610A03TG-AAT

(If Installed)NOTE:o If there is no CD or the auxiliary device

is not connected, the mode cannot beconverted to the CD, AUX, USB oriPod mode.

o Each mode may not available for someaudiomodels

CDP, AUX (USB), iPod modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton



NOTE:Do not operate audio remote controlswitches simultaneously.

(1) MODE Switch

Each press of the switch changes the dis-play as follows:

OTG048805

RADIO(FM1-FM2/AM/XM1-XM3)→CD*→CDC*

→

audio models.

(2) SEEK/PRESET ( / ) Switch

o If the button is pressed for 0.8 second ormore, it will work as follows in eachmode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CDP, AUX (USB), iPod modeIt will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC modeIt will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

o If the button is pressed for less than 0.8second, it will work as follows in eachmode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the PRESET STATION

select buttons.

button.

(3) VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to deceasevolume.

(4) MUTE Switch

o Press the MUTE switch to silence thesound.

o Once again press the MUTE switch torestore the sound.

Detailed information for audio control but-tons is described in the audio system of thissection.

→USB* or iPod*,AUX*

* : If Installed




130 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01TG-GAT

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator5 Rear Ventilator



OTG040717L

5. Rear Ventilator


131

131

B710B01TG-AAT

VentilatorTo change the direction of the air flow, turnthe control knob (1). To control the amountof air, turn the control knob (2). The ventsare opened when the vent knob is movedto " " position. The vents are closedwhen the vent knob is moved to " ". Keepthese vents clear of any obstructions.



B710B01TG

B710B02TG

y


132 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-matic heating and cooling control systemcontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.

B970B02TG-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls



1. Temperature Control Switch(Driver's side)

2. Defroster Switch3. Front/Rear Window Defroster Switch4. Blower Fan Control Switch5. Air Intake Control Switch

(Recirculation mode)6. Air Intake Control Switch (Fresh mode)7. Temperature Control Switch

(Front passenger's side)

B970B02TG

8. Display Window (Driver's side)9. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch10. OFF Switch11. Air Flow Control Switch12. Air Conditioning Switch13. Dual Temperature Control Selection

Switch14. Display Window

(Front passenger's side)


133

133

B970C01TG-AAT

Automatic OperationYou can change the temperature modefrom Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows;Press the DUAL and MODE button si-multaneously for 3 seconds.The display shows that the unit of tem-perature is adjusted to Fahrenheit orCentigrade (°F→→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F)



The FATC (Full Automatic TemperatureControl) system automatically controlsheating and cooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator

light will illuminate confirming that theFace, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes aswell as the blower speed and air condi-tioner will be controlled automatically.The air conditioning will operate if am-bient temperature is higher than34.7°F(1.5°C) and automatically turnsoff if the ambient temperature dropsbelow 33.08°F(0.6°C).

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the de-sired temperature.The temperature will increase to themaximum "HI" by pushing on thebutton. Each push of the button willcause the temperature to increase by1°F(0.5°C).

The temperature will decrease to theminimum "LO" by pushing on thebutton. Each push of the button willcause the temperature to decrease by1°F(0.5°C).

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature mode willreset to 73 °F.

Centigrade (°F→→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F).

B970C03TG

B970C04TG

OTG020095

Photo Sensor

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensorwhich is located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heatingand cooling system.


134

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control SwitchB980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the "AUTO" button. Inthis state, the system sequentially worksaccording to the order of buttons selected.Th f ti f th b tt hi h t

B740D02Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when youfirst get in, open the windows for a fewminutes to expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed tok h t i t



The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the appropriate fanspeed control button. The higher the fanspeed is, the more air is delivered. Press-ing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

B980B02TG

The function of the buttons which are notselected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convertto automatic control of the system.

keep hot air out.o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic,

shift to a lower gear. This increasesengine speed, which in turn increasesthe speed of the air conditioning com-pressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air condition-ing off to avoid the possibility of theengine overheating.

o During winter months or in periods whenthe air conditioning is not used regu-larly, run the air conditioning once ev-ery month for a few minutes. This will

help circulate the lubricants and keepyour system in peak operating condi-tion.




136

B980E01TG-GAT

Air Flow ControlB980D01TG-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffB985A01LZ-GAT

Dual Temperature Control SelectionSwitch



B980E02TG

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air canbe directed to the floor, dashboard outlets,or windshield. Four symbols are used torepresent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.

When pushing the "OFF" button, all of theA/C function will go off except the air flowcontrol and air intake control.

B980D01TG

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually

Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually (The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated).

B985A01TG

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally

Press the DUAL button again to deactivateDUAL mode (The indicator light on thebutton goes off).The passenger side temperature will be

set to the same as the driver side tempera-ture.


137

137



HTG2128

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents,floor vents and rear ventilator. This makesit possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from the

floor outlets at the same time.

HTG2127

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air tobe discharged through the face level ventsand rear ventilator.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.

HTG2129


138

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilationsystem, temporarily set the air intakecontrol at the position. Be sure toreturn the control to the positionwhen the irritation has passed to keep

B980C01TG-AAT

Defrost Switch



p pfresh air in the vehicle. This will helpkeep the driver alert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should be takenthat these are not blocked by leaves,snow, ice or other obstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air ( ) position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on the airconditioning system, and adjust tem-

perature control to desired tempera-ture.

HTG2130

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, side de-froster nozzle and side ventilator .If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the

A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the" " mode will be automatically selectedand the air will be discharged through thewindshield defrost nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator. If the "Defrost"

mode is selected, the A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated to improve windshield defrost-ing. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperatureis higher than 37.4°F (3°C) and automati-cally turns off if the ambient temperaturedrops below 32°F (0°C) in manual opera-tion.In automatic operation, the air condition-ing will operate if ambient temperature ishigher than 34.7°F (1.5°C) and automati-cally turns off if the ambient temperaturedrops below 33.08°F (0.6°C).

B980C02TG


139

139DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A01LZ-AAT



To remove interior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the fan speed control to the maximum speed.

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the fan speed control to the maximum speed.

o Set the temperature control to warm.

NOTE:

When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on

the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the

low position.

B725A03TG-A B725A04TG-A

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield;


140

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severeconditions such as dusty, rough roads,more frequent climate control air fil-

!

CLIMATE CONTROL AIRFILTER

B760A02TG-AAT

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWERUNIT)

Outside air

Inside air



ter inspections and changes are re-quired.

o When the air flow rate is suddenlydecreased, the system should bechecked at an authorized dealer.

The climate control air filter is located in theupper portion of the blower fan.It operates to decrease the amount of pol-lutants entering the car.

To replace the climate control air filter,refer to page 6-14.

B760A01TG

Inside of a vehicle

Evaporator core Filter

Blower

Inside air


141

141STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢¢ ¢ ¢

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works FM radio station

FM reception

AM reception



¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high fre-quencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-casts generally begin to fade at short dis-tances from the station. Also, FM signalsare easily affected by buildings, moun-tains, or other obstructions. These can

result in certain listening conditions whichmight lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditionsare normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is be-cause AM radio waves are transmitted atlow frequencies. These long, low fre-quency radio waves can follow the curva-ture of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addi-

tion, they curve around obstructions sothat they can provide better signal cover-age.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by the radioantenna on your car. This signal is thenreceived by the radio and sent to your car

speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear.This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closenessof other strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other large

obstructions in the area.

JBM002 JBM003

JBM001


142

¢ ¢ ¢

Satellite radio reception

You the inability to receive XMTM satelliteradio signals in the following situations.



o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may beginto play. This is because your radio isdesigned to lock onto the clearest sig-nal. If this occurs, select another stationwith a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflectedsignal from the same station, or by sig-nals from two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, select anotherstation until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, we suggest that you select an-other stronger station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter

and your radio can disturb the signalcausing static or fluttering noises tooccur. Reducing the treble level maylessen this effect until the disturbanceclears.

JBM004

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a coveredparking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top levelof a multi-level freeway.• If you drive under a bridge.• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle

(such as a truck or a bus) that block thesignal.

• If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block thesignal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere the signal is blocked by moun-

tains.

JBM005

SATELITE1


143

143

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradio

When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the audio equip-ment. In such a case, use the cellularphone at a place as far aspossible from the

CARE OF DISCS

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling



!

phone at a place as far as possible from theaudio equipment.

WARNING:Hyundai recommends that you neveruse a cell phone while driving. This couldresult in loss of control, and an accidentthat may cause death, serious injury, orproperty damage. You must stop at asafe place to use a cellular phone.

NOTE:Some states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of the spe-cific requirements in your area.

• If you are driving in an area with tall treesthat block the signal (10m or more) ; forexample, on a road through a denseforest.

• The signal can become weak in someareas that are not covered by the re-peater station network.

This is a normal characteristic of satelliteradio reception.Please note that there may be other causesreception issues with XMTM satellite radiosignal.

SATELITE2

Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will not leavefingerprints on the surface. If the surface isscratched, it may cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, orgummed labels on the disc. Do not write onthe disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warpedor cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.

B850A01L


144

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled into theunit by the self loading mechanism.

K Y Di Cl

AVN (AUDIO, VIDEO ANDNAVIGATION) SYSTEM

B875D01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTE:If you install an aftermarket HIDheadlamp, your vehicle's audio andelectronic device may malfunction.



B850A02L

Keep Your Discs Clean

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skip signaltracks. Wipe the surface clean with a cleansoft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled,dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution ofmild neutral detergent to wipe it clean. Seedrawing.

AVN (Audio, Video and Navigation Sys-tem) is available as an optional feature forlocal area. If you need to choose this sys-tem, consult your authorized Hyundaidealer.If your vehicle has a locally installed AVN,you can refer to the AVN operation manualprovided with AVN for more detailed func-tion.

B875D01TG-M


145

145

B880A01NF-AAT

Satellite Antenna (If Installed)

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper toremove foreign deposits from the in-ner surface of the glass as this maycause damage to the antenna ele-

!B870D01Y-AAT

ANTENNAGlass Antenna



The satellite antenna is installed on theroof of your car to listen to a satellite radiobroadcast. This antenna is fixed by nut andit can not be removed.

NOTE:

In the place like a tunnel where the sat-ellite broadcast signal can not bereached, the ability of broadcast signalreception can be affected and downed.

ONF048133N

ments.

o Avoid adding metallic coatings to therear window glass, such as Ni, Cd, etc.These can disturb receiving AM andFM broadcast signals.

When the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the "ON"or "ACC" position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals through

the antenna in the rear window glass.

OTG040746L


146

PA710SA01NF-AAT

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710S) (If Installed)

1 FM S l i B



OTGAUDIO-25

1. FM Selection Button

2. AM Selection Button3. XM Selection Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. Information Display Button10. SET UP Button11. TUNE/ENTER Button12. CAT(FLDR) Button13. Pre-set Button


147

PA710SB01TG-AAT


Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed each time.

2. AM Selection Button

Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.

3 XM Selection Button

5. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 200khzto automatically select channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channelis found.

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by

8. MUTE Button

Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.

9. Information Display Button

Information Display function operation (In-formation is displayed each time (the) Keyis pressed) : Pressing the Category/ Channel➟ Artist Name/SongTitl C t /Ch l f 3 d



3. XM Selection Button

Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the orderof XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟···➟XM1··· when thebutton is pressed each time.

4. CD/AUX Selection Button

If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns toCD mode, and if a device is connected toAUX then it toggles.CD➟AUX➟CD··· when the button ispressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX ifthe auxiliary device is not connected)The volume and tone of AUX mode isadjusted separately from the RADIO/CDmode.

it increases the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.

6. Power ON/OFF & Volume ControlButton

Turns the set on/off when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN Button

If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill increase and receive the correspond-ing broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) eachand find other broadcasts as the frequencyincreases.Press the button again when desiring to

continue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

Title➟Category/Channel... for 3 seconds

will display the corresponding text thenbecome restored.

Text Scroll operationAfter pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the Tune Knob will operatethe Page up function displaying 16(Max.characters) characters for 3 seconds eachdispalys.

10. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the XM option,TEXT SCROLL and adjustment mode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right andPUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The set up item changes from TEXT

SCROLL➟

XM...




149

PA710SC01NF-AAT

CD (PA710S) (If Installed)



1. CD loading slot2. CD indicator3. CD Eject Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Track Selection Button6. INFO Button7. TUNE/ENTER Button8. REPEAT Button9. RANDOM Play Button10. SCAN Play Button11. MUTE Button

OTGAUDIO-26


150

PA710SD01TG-AAT

1. CD loading slot

Please face printed side upward and gen-tly push in. When the ignition switch is onACC or ON and power is off, power isautomatically turned on if the CD is loaded.This CDP supports 12 cm CD. If VCD, DataCD are loaded, "Reading Error" messagewill appear and CD will be ejected.

5. Automatic Track Selection Button

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8second to play from the beginning ofcurrent song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8second and press again within 1 sec-ond to play the previous song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate reverse direction high speed

d h f t

7. TUNE/ENTER Button

Turn this button clockwise to display songsafter current song.Also, turn this button counterclockwise todisplay songs before current song.To listen to the displayed song, press thebutton to skip to the song and play.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE TREBLE FADER dBALANCE



2. CD IndicatorWhen car ignition switch is ACC or ON andif the CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted.If the CD is ejected the light is turned off.

3. CD eject Button

Push button to eject the CD during CDplayback. This button is enabled whenignition switch is off.


If the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.If no Disc and auxiliary device is con-nected, it displays "NO Media" for 5 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.

sound search of current song.o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8

second to play the next song.o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer

to initiate high speed sound search ofcurrent song.

6. INFO Button

Displays the information of the current CDTRACK in the order of DISC TITLE➟ DISCARTIST➟TRACK TITLE➟ TRACKARTIST➟TOTAL TRACK➟ Play Screen➟DISC TITLE➟···.(not displayed if the infor-mation is not available on the DISC.)

MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCETUNE mode. The mode selected is shownon the display. After selecting each mode,rotate the Audio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

o BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o MIDDLE ControlTo increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.


151

o FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

o BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

10. SCAN Play Button

Plays first 10 seconds of each song in theDISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

11. MUTE Button

Press this button to temporarily cut off theSound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on the

NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a nomal range by us-ing the vehicle’s air conditioning orheating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

o All stored bookmarks are all erased



right speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counter clockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

8.REPEAT Button

Repeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 second.Repeats the entire DISC when the button

is pressed for 0.8 second or longer.

9. RANDOM Play Button

Turns on/off the randomization of the playlist of files in the currently played DISC.To cancel the mode, press the key onceagain.

p y

LCD. Press the button once again to can-cel MUTE mode.

when the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

o when driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wa-ter or excessive moisture.


152

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not place beverages close to the



audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything to im-pact the audio system, damage to thesystem mechanisms could occur.

o Off-road or rough sunface driving maycause the compact disc to skip. Donot use the compact disc when driv-ing in such conditions as damage tothe compact disc face could occur.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.


153

PA710SE01NF-AAT

USING USB (PA710S) (If Installed)

1. AUX Selection Button



2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8. SCAN Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-27




155

o BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

6. RANDOM Playback Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 second

! CAUTION IN USINGUSB DEVICE:

o To use an external USB device, makesure the device is not mounted whenstarting up the vehicle and mount thedevice after starting up.

o If you start the vehicle when the USBdevice is mounted, it may damage theUSB device. (USB is not ESA)

o Depending on the condition of theexternal USB device, the connectedexternal USB device can be unrecog-nizable.

o When the formatted byte/sector set-ting of External USB devices is noteither 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, thenthe device will not be recognized.

o Use only a USB device formatted toFAT 12/16/32.



to start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.

7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button

Plays 10 seconds of each song in the USBdevice.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.

( )o If the vehicle is started up or turned off

while the external USB device is con-nected, the external USB device maynot work.

o It may not play inauthentic MP3 orWMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with thecompression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with

the compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

o Take cautions for static electricitywhen mounting or dismounting theexternal USB device.

o An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not rec-ognizable.

o USB devices without USB I/F authen-tication may not be recognizable.

o Make sure the USB connection termi-nal does not come in contact with ahuman body or any object.

o If you repeat mounting or dismount-ing USB device in a short period oftime, it may break the device.

o You might hear a strange noise whenmounting or dismounting a USB de-

vice.o If you dismount the external USB de-vice during playback in USB mode,the external USB device can be dam-aged or malfunction. Therefore, dis-mount the external USB device whenthe engine is turned off or in anothermode.




157

PA710SG01NF-AATRUNNING i-Pod ® (PA710S) (If Installed)

1. i-Pod Selection Button



2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button7. REPEAT Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-28

* i-Pod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.




159




to activate or deactivate the random play

NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)

o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audiosystem.

o If the iPod crashes due to its own

trouble reset the iPod (Reset: Refer

! CAUTION:o You need the power cable exclusive

for an iPod in order to operate the iPodwith the buttons on the audio system.The PC cable provided by Apple maycause a malfunction and should notbe used in the vehicle.

o When connecting the device with theiPod cable, push in the jack fully.Wh dj ti th d ff t f



to activate or deactivate the random play-back of the songs within the current cat-egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 secondto randomly play all songs in the entirealbum of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel themode.

7. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.

trouble, reset the iPod. (Reset: Referto iPod manual)o An iPod may not operate normally on

low battery.

o When adjusting the sound effects ofthe iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices mayoverlap and distort the quality of thesound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of the iPod when adjustingthe audio system's volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of the iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected, thesystem can be switched to the AUXmode even without the iPod deviceand may cause noise. Disconnect theiPod cable when not using the iPoddevice.

o When the iPod is not used with theaudio system, the iPod cable shouldbe removed from the iPod.


160

PA760SA01NF-AAT

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA760S) (If Installed)


2 AM Selection Button3 XM S l ti B tt



2. AM Selection Button3. XM Selection Button4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. Information Display Button10. SET UP Button11. TUNE/ENTER Button12. CAT(FLDR) Button

13. Pre-set Button

OTGAUDIO-29


161

PA760SB01TG-AAT1. FM Selection Button



Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.

3. XM Selection Button

Turns toXMmode and toggles in theorder

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.


Turns the set on/off when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button is

turned to the right it increases the volume

9. Information Display ButtonInformation Display function operation (In-formation is displayed each time (the) Keyis pressed) : Pressing the Category/ Channel➟ Artist Name/SongTitle➟Category/Channel... for 3 secondswill display the corresponding text thenbecome restored.

Text Scroll operation

After pressing (the) Key if the text to be



Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the orderof XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟···➟XM1··· when thebutton is pressed each time.


If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns toCD mode, and if a device is connected toAUX then it toggles.CD➟AUX➟CD··· when the button ispressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX if

the auxiliary device is not connected)The volume and tone of AUX mode isadjusted separately from the RADIO/CDmode.

5. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 200khzto automatically select channel. Stops

at the previous frequency if no channelis found.

turned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN Button

If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill increase and receive the correspond-ing broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) eachand find other broadcasts as the frequencyincreases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

8. MUTE Button


After pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the Tune Knob will operatethe Page up function displaying 16(Max.characters) characters for 3 seconds eachdispalys.

10. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the XM option,TEXT SCROLL and adjustment mode.

If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right andPUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The set up item changes from TEXTSCROLL➟XM...




163

PA760SC01NF-AAT

CDC (PA760S) (If Installed)

1. CD loading slot2 CD indicator



g2. CD indicator3. CD Eject Button4. LOAD Button5. CD/AUX Selection Button6. Automatic Track Selection Button7. INFO Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. REPEAT Button10. RANDOM Play Button11. DISC Selection Button

12. SCAN Play Button13. MUTE Button

OTGAUDIO-30


164

PA760SD01TG-AAT

1. CD loading slot

Please face printed side upward and gen-tly push in. When the ignition switch is onACC or ON and power is off, power isautomatically turned on if the CD is loaded.This CDP supports 12 cm CD. If VCD, DataCD are loaded, "Reading Error" messagewill appear and CD will be ejected.

2. CD IndicatorIf th LOADb tt i d thi i di t

5. CD/AUX Selection ButtonIf the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.If no auxiliary device is connected, it dis-plays ""NO MEDIA"" for 5 seconds andreturns to the previous mode.

6. Automatic Track Selection Button

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8second to play from the beginning of

7. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the current CDTRACK in the order of DISC TITLE➟ DISCARTIST➟TRACK TITLE➟ TRACKARTIST➟TOTAL TRACK➟ Play Screen➟DISC TITLE➟···.(not displayed if the infor-mation is not available on the DISC.)


Turn this button clockwise to display songsafter current song.



If the LOAD button is pressed, this indicatorwill begin to blink.

3. CD eject Button

Push button to eject the CD during CDplayback. This button is enabled whenignition switch is off.

4. CD LOAD Button

Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to avail-able CDC deck (from 1~6). Push [LOAD]button for more than 2 seconds to load intoall available decks.The last CD will play. 10 seconds idlestatus will disable loading process.

[ ]second to play from the beginning ofcurrent song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8second and press again within 1 sec-ond to play the previous song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate reverse direction high speedsound search of current song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8second to play the next song.

o Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longerto initiate high speed sound search ofcurrent song.

p y gafter current song.Also, turn this button counterclockwise todisplay songs before current song.To listen to the displayed song, press thebutton to skip to the song and play.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCETUNE mode. The mode selected is shownon the display. After selecting each mode,

rotate the Audio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.



165


o TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-i k d (f t k

9. REPEAT ButtonRepeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 second.Repeats the entire DISC when the buttonis pressed for 0.8 second or longer.



NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of theunit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a nomal range by us-ing the vehicle’s air conditioning orheating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnected

or power to the vehocle is lost. if thisth b k k ill h t b



size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

o BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).

11. DISC Selection Button

o [DISC ] Change ButtonChanges disc to the previous disc.

o [DISC ] Change ButtonChanges disc to the next disc.



13. MUTE Button

Press this button to temporarily cut off theSound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on theLCD. Press the button once again to can-cel MUTE mode.

occurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.


o when driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wa-ter or excessive moisture.


166




o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spillthem



them.o Do not strike or allow anything to im-

pact the audio system, damage to thesystem mechanisms could occur.




167

PA760SE01NF-AAT

USING USB (PA760S) (If Installed)

1. AUX Selection Button2. Track moving Button3. INFO Selection Button4 Folder moving Button



4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8. SCAN Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-31




169




to start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.P th b tt f th 0 8 d




o If the vehicle is started up or turned offwhile the external USB device is con-




o USB devices without USB I/F authen-tication may not be recognizable.



Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.

7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.

Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button


nected, the external USB device maynot work.



2) It can only play WMA music files with

the compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.o Take cautions for static electricity

when mounting or dismounting theexternal USB device.


o Make sure the USB connection termi-nal does not come in contact with ahuman body or any object.

o If you repeat mounting or dismount-ing USB device in a short period oftime, it may break the device.

o You might hear a strange noise whenmounting or dismounting a USB de-vice.

o If you dismount the external USB de-vice during playback in USB mode,the external USB device can be dam-aged or malfunction. Therefore, dis-mount the external USB device whenthe engine is turned off or in anothermode.


170

o Depending on the type and capacityof the external USB device or the typeof the files stored in the device, thereis a difference in the time taken forrecognition of the device. This is nor-mal and waiting may be necessary.

o Do not use the USB device for otherpurposes than playing music files.

o Use of USB accessories such as arecharger or heater using USB I/F

may lower performance or causetrouble.If d i h USBh b

o USB flash memory reader (such asCF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices may be unrecog-nized.

o Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are notrecognizable.

o The data in the USB memory may belost while using this AUDIO. It isrecommeded to back up important

data on a personal storage device.o Please avoid using USB memory prod-

t hi h b d k h i



o If you use devices such as a USB hubyou purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may not rec-ognize the USB device. Connect theUSB device directly to the multimediaterminal of the vehicle.

o If the USB device is divided by logicaldrives, only the music files on thehighest-priority drive are recognizedby the car audio.

o Devices, such as MP3 players, cellu-lar phones, or digital cameras notrecognized by standard USB I/F maynot be recognized.

o USB devices other than standardizedgoods (METAL COVER TYPE USB)can be unrecognizable.

ucts which can be used as key chainsor cellular phone accessories as theycould cause damage to the USB jack.Please make certain only to use plugtype connector products as shownbelow.


171

PA760SG01NF-AAT

RUNNING i-Pod ® (PA760S) (If Installed)

1. i-Pod Selection Button2. Track moving Button

3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button



g y5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button7. REPEAT Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-32





173




to activate or deactivate the random play-back of the songs within the current cat-egory.



o When connecting the device with theiPod cable, push in the jack fully.

o When adjusting the sound effects ofthe iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices may

NOTE:o Some iPod models might not supportthe communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)


o If the iPod crashes due to its owntrouble, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer

to iPod manual)o An iPod may not operate normally on

lo batter



egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 secondto randomly play all songs in the entirealbum of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel themode.

7. REPEAT Button


sound effects of both devices mayoverlap and distort the quality of thesound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of the iPod when adjustingthe audio system's volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of the iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected, thesystem can be switched to the AUXmode even without the iPod deviceand may cause noise. Disconnect theiPod cable when not using the iPoddevice.


low battery.


174

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710) (If Installed)

1. FM Selection Button2. AM Selection Button

3. CD Selection Button4. AUX Selection Button5 Automatic Channel Selection Button



5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. SET UP Button10. TUNE/ENTER Button11. Pre-set Button

OTGAUDIO-17


175

1. FM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed each time.


Pressing the AM button selects the AMband. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

3. CD Selection Button

If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it plays theCD.Press CD button to automatically insert CD

5. Automatic Channel Selection But-ton

o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 100khzto automatically select channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channelis found.

o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by100khz to automatically select chan-

nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.

8. MUTE ButtonPress to temporarily cut off the Sound.

9. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the TEXTSCROLL, and adjustment mode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right and

PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)

10 TUNE/ENTERButton



ywhen the disc is ejected from the deck bypressing CD EJECT.


If the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.

If no Disc and auxiliary device is con-nected, it displays “NO Media” for 5 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.The volume and tone of AUX mode isadjusted separately from the RADIO/CDmode.


Turns on/off the set when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN ButtonIf this button is pressed, the frequencieswill become increased and receive thecorresponding broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds each and find other broadcastsas the frequency increases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.


Turn this button clockwise by one notch toincrease frequency by 200kHz from cur-rent frequency.Turn this button counterclockwise by onenotch to decrease frequency by 200kHzfrom current frequency.Press this button while holding SET UPbutton to activate / inactivate the item toselect SET UP item using left and rightfunction of the Tune button.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCETUNE mode. The mode selected is shownon the display. After selecting each mode,rotate the Audio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.


176



o TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

11. Pre-set ButtonPush [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 secondto play the channel saved in each button.Push pre-set button for 0.8 second or longerto save current channel to the respectivebutton with a beep.

! CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The audio systemmechanism may be damaged if you

i



o FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rear

speaker sound will be attenuated).


spill them.o Do not strike or allow anything to im-



177

CD (PA710) (If Installed)

1. CD loading slot2. CD indicator

3. CD Eject Button4. AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Track Selection Button



6. INFO Button7. TUNE/ENTER Button8. REPEAT Button9. RANDOM Play Button10. SCAN Play Button11. MUTE Button

OTGAUDIO-18




179


8. REPEAT Button

Repeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 second.Repeats the current folder when the buttonis pressed for 0.8 second or longer. (If thereis no folder, entire disc will be repeated.)

NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a nomal range by us-

ing the vehicle’s air conditioning orheating system.o When replacing the fuse, replace it

with a fuse having the correct capac-




o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything to im-pacttheaudiosystem damagetothe

11. MUTE Button

Press this button to temporarily cut off theSound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on theLCD. Press the button once again to can-cel MUTE mode.



is no folder, entire disc will be repeated.)





with a fuse having the correct capacity.

o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.

o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.


o when driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-

cluding the speakers and CD) to wa-ter or excessive moisture.





180

USING USB (PA710) (If Installed)

1. AUX Selection Button2. Track moving Button

3. INFO Selection Button4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6 Random Pla back B tton



6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8. SCAN Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-19




182

o BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).


Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB d i




o If the vehicle is started up or turned offwhile the external USB device is con-nected, the external USB device maynot work.




o USB devices without USB I/F authen-tication may not be recognizable.o Make sure the USB connection termi-

nal does not come in contact with a



USB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.

7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.

Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button




2) It can only play WMA music files withthe compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.o Take cautions for static electricity



human body or any object.o If you repeat mounting or dismount-

ing USB device in a short period oftime, it may break the device.




183



o Use of USB accessories such as arecharger or heater using USB I/Fmay lower performance or causetrouble.

o If you use devices such as a USB hubyou purchased separately, the

hi l ’ di t t



o The data in the USB memory may belost while using this AUDIO. It isrecommeded to back up importantdata on a personal storage device.

o Please avoid using USB memory prod-ucts which can be used as key chainsor cellular phone accessories as they

ld d t th USBj k



vehicle’s audio system may not rec-ognize the USB device. Connect theUSB device directly to the multimediaterminal of the vehicle.

o If the USB device is divided by logicaldrives, only the music files on thehighest-priority drive are recognized

by the car audio.o Devices, such as MP3 players, cellu-

lar phones, or digital cameras notrecognized by standard USB I/F maynot be recognized.


could cause damage to the USB jack.Please make certain only to use plugtype connector products as shownbelow.


184

RUNNING i-Pod ® (PA710) (If Installed)


3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button



y7. REPEAT Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-20





186

o BALANCE Control



Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto activate or deactivate the random play-back of the songs within the current cat-egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 secondto randomly play all songs in the entire




o When adjusting the sound effects ofthe iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices mayoverlap and distort the quality of thesound

NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)


o If the iPod crashes due to its owntrouble, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer

to iPod manual)o An iPod may not operate normally on

low battery.



to randomly play all songs in the entirealbum of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel themode.

7. REPEAT Button


sound.o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of the iPod when adjustingthe audio system's volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of the iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected, the

system can be switched to the AUXmode even without the iPod deviceand may cause noise. Disconnect theiPod cable when not using the iPoddevice.



187

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA760) (If Installed)

1. FM Selection Button2. AM Selection Button

3. CD Selection Button4. AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Power ON/OFF7 SCAN Button



7. SCAN Button8. MUTE Button9. SET UP Button10. TUNE/ENTER Button11. Pre-set Button

OTGAUDIO-21


188




Pressing the AM button selects the AMband. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

3. CD Selection Button

If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it plays theCD.Press CD button to automatically insert CDwhen the disc is ejected from the deck by

i CD EJECT

5. Automatic Channel Selection But-

ton

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it reduces the band frequency by 0.1Mhzto automatically select channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channelis found.

o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by0.1Mhz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.


8. MUTE Button


9. SET UP Button

Press this button to turn to the TEXTSCROLL, and adjustment mode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to the playmode.(After entering SET UP mode, movebetween items using the left, right and

PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)


Turn this button clockwise by one notch to



pressing CD EJECT.


If the auxiliary device is connected, it turnsto AUX MODE to play the sound from theauxiliary player.

If no Disc and auxiliary device is con-nected, it displays “NO Media” for 5 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.The volume and tone of AUX mode isadjusted separately from the RADIO/CDmode.

utto

Turns on/off the set when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

7. SCAN ButtonIf this button is pressed, the frequencieswill become increased and receive thecorresponding broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for5 seconds each and find other broadcastsas the frequency increases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

yincrease frequency by 200kHz from cur-rent frequency.Turn this button counterclockwise by onenotch to decrease frequency by 200kHzfrom current frequency.Press this button while holding SET UP

button to activate / inactivate the item toselect SET UP item using left and rightfunction of the Tune button.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCETUNE mode. The mode selected is shownon the display. After selecting each mode,rotate the Audio control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.


189

o BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.


o TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

o FADER Control

11. Pre-set Button

Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 secondto play the channel saved in each button.Push pre-set button for 0.8 second or longerto save current channel to the respectivebutton with a beep.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio systemmechanism may be damaged if youspill them.

o Do not strike or allow anything to im-



o Co oTurn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speakersound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).


y gpact the audio system, damage to thesystem mechanisms could occur.


190

CDC (PA760) (If Installed)

1. CD loading slot2. CD indicator

3. CD Eject Button4. LOAD Button5. AUX Selection Button6. Automatic Track Selection Button7. INFO Button



O u8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. REPEAT Button10. RANDOM Play Button11. DISC selection Button12. SCAN Play Button13. MUTE Button

OTGAUDIO-22




194

USING USB (PA760) (If Installed)

1. AUX Selection Button2. Track moving Button

3. INFO Selection Button4. Folder moving Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. Random Playback Button7. Repeat Selection Button8 SCAN Selection Button



8. SCAN Selection Button

OTGAUDIO-23




196

o BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knobis turned counter clockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speakersound will be attenuated).


Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of the

songs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the mode.




o If the vehicle is started up or turned offwhile the external USB device is con-nected, the external USB device maynot work.





o USB devices without USB I/F authen-

tication may not be recognizable.o Make sure the USB connection termi-

nal does not come in contact with ahuman body or any object.

o If you repeat mounting or dismount-i USB d i i h i d f



7. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 second

to repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

8. SCAN Button



2) It can only play WMA music files withthe compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.o Take cautions for static electricity



ing USB device in a short period oftime, it may break the device.




197



o Use of USB accessories such as arecharger or heater using USB I/Fmay lower performance or cause

trouble.o If you use devices such as a USB hub

you purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may not rec-ognize the USB device. Connect theUSB devicedirectly to themultimedia



o The data in the USB memory may belost while using this AUDIO. It isrecommeded to back up importantdata on a personal storage device.

o Please avoid using USB memory prod-ucts which can be used as key chainsor cellular phone accessories as theycould cause damage to the USB jack.Please make certain only to use plugtype connector products as shown



USB device directly to the multimediaterminal of the vehicle.

o If the USB device is divided by logicaldrives, only the music files on thehighest-priority drive are recognized

by the car audio.o Devices, such as MP3 players, cellu-lar phones, or digital cameras notrecognized by standard USB I/F maynot be recognized.


type connector products as shownbelow.


198

RUNNING i-Pod ® (PA760) (If Installed)


3. INFO Selection Button4. Category Selection Button5. TUNE/ENTER Button6. RANDOM Playback Button7. REPEAT Selection Button



OTGAUDIO-24





200

o BALANCE Control



Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto activate or deactivate the random play-

back of the songs within the current cat-egory.Press the button for longer than 0.8 secondto randomly play all songs in the entirealbum of the i-Pod.Press the button once again to cancel the




o When adjusting the sound effects ofthe iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices mayoverlap and distort the quality of thesound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of the iPod when adjusting

NOTE:

o Some iPod models might not supportthe communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)


o If the iPod crashes due to its owntrouble, reset the iPod. (Reset: Referto iPod manual)

o An iPod may not operate normally onlow battery.



gmode.

7. REPEAT Button


function of the iPod when adjustingthe audio system's volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of the iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected, the

system can be switched to the AUXmode even without the iPod deviceand may cause noise. Disconnect theiPod cable when not using the iPoddevice.


DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous!............................ 2-2

Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3

Key Positions................................................................ 2-4

Starting ......................................................................... 2-5

Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-6

Power Adjustable Pedals.............................................2-10Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................... 2-11

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................2-11

Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-13

Driving for Economy ....................................................2-15

2



2 Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-16

Winter Driving ..............................................................2-16

Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................. 2-20

Vehicle Load Limit ........................................................2-23Vehicle Weight .............................................................2-29

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open thewindows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you

hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, havethe exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the enginein your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car

!



o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshieldare kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

!! CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety ofautomobile components and parts, in-cluding components found in the interiorfurnishings in a vehicle, contain or emitchemicals known to the State of Califor-nia to cause cancer and birth defectsand reproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehicles and cer-tain products of component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

BEFORE STARTINGTHE ENGINE

C020A02TG-AAT

Before you start the engine, you shouldalways:

1. Look around the vehicle to be surethere are no flat tires, puddles of oil,water or other indications of possibletrouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be surethe parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lights areclean.

4. Check that the interior and exteriormirrors are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and head-rest to be sure they are in their properpositions.

6. Lock all the doors.

WARNING:o Always wear appropriate shoes when

operating your vehicle. Unsuitableshoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) mayinterfere with your ability to use thebrake and accelerator pedal.

o All passengers must be properly beltedwhenever the vehicle is moving.

o Always check the surrounding areasnear your vehicle for people, espe-

cially children, before putting a carinto 'drive'.

o When you intend to park or stop thevehicle with the engine on, be carefulnot to depress the accelerator pedalfor a long period of time. It may over-



6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that

all other occupants have fastenedtheirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessories that

are not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to

"ON", check that all appropriate warn-ing lights are operating and that youhave sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lightsand all bulbs when key is in the "ON"position.

g p yheat the engine or exhaust systemand cause fire.

o Driving while distracted can result ina loss of vehicle control, that may lead

to an accident, severe personal in-jury, and death. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe and legaloperation of a vehicle, and use of anyhandheld devices, other equipment,or vehicle systems which take thedriver’s eyes, attention and focusaway from the safe operation of avehicle or which are not permissibleby law should never be used duringoperation of the vehicle.


4 KEY POSITIONS

C040A02A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or the

!

C040A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01TG-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) anddepress the brake pedal fully.

o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:

o For safety, the engine will not start ifthe shift lever is not in "P" or "N"Position.

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" positionunless the shift lever is in the "P"(Park) position or the negative bat-

! WARNING:o When you make a sudden stop or turn

the steering wheel rapidly, loose ob-jects may drop on the floor and it couldinterfere with the operation of the footpedals, possibly causing an accident.Keep all things in the vehicle safelystored.

o If you do not focus on driving, it maycause an accident. Be careful when

operating what may disturb drivingsuch as audio or heater. It is the re-sponsibility of the driver to alwaysdrive safely.



key removed from the ignition key cylin-der while the car is in motion. The steer-ing wheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It willcrank until you release the key.

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" posi-tion for more than 15 seconds.

(Park) position or the negative battery terminal is disconnected fromthe battery. To remove the key, al-ways confirm that the shift lever issecurely positioned in "P" (Park).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

!WARNING:

Always, confirm the position of the brake

and accelerator pedal before driving. Ifyou don't check the position of the accel-erator and brake pedal before driving,you may depress the accelerator in-stead of the brake pedal. It may cause aserious accident.


5

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, theignition is on and all accessories may beturned on. If the engine is not running, thekey should not be left in the "ON" position.This will discharge the battery and mayalso damage the ignition system.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, some

electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beoperated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" posi-tion.

2. Simultaneously push and turn the igni-ti k t l k i f th

C070C01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

STARTING

!

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

i i

C050A01E



To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:

If difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheelright and left to release the tension.

tion key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

ventilated area any longer than is neededto move your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odor-less and can cause serious injury or

death.


6

Depress the brake pedal when shift-ing.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

C090A01TG

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A02TG-GAT

Automatic transaxle operation

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has six forward speeds and onereverse speed. The individual speeds are

l t d t ti ll d di th

OTG030110

C050B02TG-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the brake pedal fully and place

the selector lever in "P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"

position, make certain all warning lightsand gauges are functioning properlybefore starting the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START"

position and release it when the enginestarts.After the engine has started, al-low the engine to run for 10 to 20 sec-onds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between starting at-



! CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position whilethe vehicle is moving.

freely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion and the shift characteristics will adjustafter several shifts are completed.

selected automatically, depending on theposition of the speed selector lever. Theselector lever has 2 gates; the main gateand the manual gate.

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions (P,R,N,D) for normal driving.Themanual gate (+, -) is used for sports modedriving.

!

15-30 seconds between starting at-tempts to protect the starter from over-heating.

WARNING:Always fully depress the brake pedalbefore and while shifting out of the "P"Park position into another position toavoid inadvertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in or aroundthe car.




9

!

C090N06O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector leverfrom "P" or "N" to any other position withthe accelerator pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into"P" when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R" or "D".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car in gearwhen moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. In-stead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down, select Sports Modeand shift to a lower gear. When you dothis engine braking will help slow the

WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu

C090J01TG-GAT

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE

If you cannot move the shift lever from the"P" (Park) position to any other positionwith the brake pedal fully depressed andthe ignition key in the "ON" position, push

OTG030111

o Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface, anabrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-pressing and releasing the acceleratorpedal.



this, engine braking will help slow thecar.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not

be engaged.o Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

killed than a properly belted occu-pant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering orturning.

o Do not make quick steering wheelmovements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

the ignition key in the ON position, pushthe shift lock release button down with athin object such as a flat-head screwdriver.Then, with the brake pedal depressed,

move the shift lever to the desired position,and then the shift lock release button willautomatically return to its original positionafter shifting from the "P" (Park) position.If you need to use the shift lock release, itcould mean your car is developing a prob-lem. Have the car checked by your Hyundaidealer.


10

!

POWER ADJUSTABLEPEDALS

C100A01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, turn the ignition key tothe "ON" position with the selector lever inthe "P" position and push the switch

C100A01TG-A

!

Setting the driver's position

1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals

to the front most position by pushing the" " portion of the switch.

3) Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4) Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the " " portion of the switch.

5) Depress the pedals a few times to get

used to the feel after adjusting.

WARNING:o Adjust the pedals after parking the

vehicle on level ground. Never at-tempt to adjust the pedals while the

o The risk of rollover is greatly in-creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenterthe roadway.

o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. In-stead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforwardandbackward Donotattempt

WARNING:



the P position and push the switch.

If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move rearward.

If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move forward.

tempt to adjust the pedals while thevehicle is moving.

o Never adjust the pedals with your footon the accelerator pedal as this may

result in increasing the engine speedand acceleration.

o Make sure that you can fully depressthe brake pedal before driving. Other-wise, you may not be able to hold downthe brake pedal firmly in an emer-gency stop.

forward and backward. Do not attemptthis procedure if people or objects areanywhere near the vehicle. Duringthe rocking operation the vehicle may

suddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing in-jury to nearby people or damage toobjects.


11

!

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYS-TEM (ABS)

C120A01TG-AAT

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is de-signed to prevent wheel lock-up duringsudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module moni-tors the wheel speed and controls thepressure applied to each brake. Thus, inemergency situations or on slick roads,ABS will increase vehicle control duringbraking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

o DuringABSoperation,apulsationmay

! WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control isimproved during emergency braking,always maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced during ex-treme road conditions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered

ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM

C310A02NF-AAT

(If Installed)

WARNING:Never drive too fast for the road condi-tions or too quickly when cornering. Elec-tronic stability control (ESC) will not pre-vent accidents. Excessive speed inturns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplan-ing on wet surfaces can still result inserious accidents. Only a safe and at-

tentive driver can prevent accidents byavoiding maneuvers that cause the ve-hicle to lose traction. Even with ESCinstalled, always follow all the normalprecautions for driving - including driv-ing at safe speeds for the conditions.



o During ABS operation, a pulsation maybe felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise maybe heard in the engine compartment

while braking. These conditions arenormal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

o Rough, gravel or snow coveredroads.

o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by highspeed driving or cornering. This couldendanger the safety of yourself or oth-ers.


12

C310B01TG-AAT

ESC ON/OFF Mode

When the ESC is operating, the ESC indi-cator in the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing theESC switch, the ESC-OFF indicator willcome on and stay on. In the ESC-OFFmode, the stability control will be deacti-vated. Adjust your driving accordingly. Toturn the system back on, press the switchagain. The ESC-OFF indicator should gooff.

NOTE:o The ESC mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turnedoff and restarted.

o A click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the ve-

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel sizesmay cause the ESC system to malfunc-tion. When replacing tires, make surethey are the same size as your originaltires.

!

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem is designed to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering manuevers. ESC checkswhere you are steering and where thevehicle is actually going. ESC applies thebrakes at individual wheels and intervenesi th i t t t t

C310A01TG-A



g phicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the Electronic

Stability Control System is function-ing properly.

o During ESC operation, a pulsation maybe felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise maybe heard in the engine compartmentwhile braking. These conditions arenormal and indicate that the Elec-tronic Stability Control System is func-tioning properly.

in the engine management system to sta-bilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-

tem is an electronic system designed tohelp the driver maintain vehicle controlunder adverse conditions. It is not a substi-tute for safe driving practices. Factors in-cluding speed, road conditions and driversteering input can all affect whether ESCwill be effective in preventing a loss ofcontrol. It is still your responsibility to driveand corner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.


13

! WARNING:ESC will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control is im-proved during emergency braking, al-ways maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced during ex-treme road conditions.The braking distance for cars equipped

with an Electronic Stability Control Sys-tem may be longer than for those withoutit in the following road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reduced speeds:

!

C310D01NF-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The ESC and ESC-OFF indicators shouldilluminate when the ignition key is turnedto ON or START but should go out afterthree seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or theESC or ESC-OFF indicator does not go outafter 3 seconds, have the vehicle checkedby an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual operation ofthe device while driving, the ESC-OFFindicator illuminates as a warning.If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, driveyour car to a safe place and stop theengine.Then, start the engine again to check if theESC-OFF indicator goes out.

GOOD BRAKING PRAC-TICES

C130A02A-AAT

! WARNING:o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,

always set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the P (Park) position.Vehicles not fully engaged in P (Park)with the parking brake firmly set areat risk for moving inadvertently andinjuring yourself or others.

o All vehicles should always have theparking brake fully engaged whenparking to avoid inadvertent move-ment of the car which can injure occu-pants or pedestrians.

o Nothing should be carried on top ofthe shelf panel behind the rear seat. If



!If the indicator remains lit even after theengine has been started, have your car

checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of ESC equippedvehicle should not be tested by highspeed driving or cornering. This couldendanger the safety of yourself or oth-ers.

WARNING:

pthere were an accident or a suddenstop, such objects could move for-ward and cause damage to the ve-

hicle or injure the occupants.




16

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions ofwinter result in greater wear and otherproblems. To minimize the problems ofwinter driving, you should follow thesesuggestions:

WINTER DRIVING

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (and not intraffic), turn off your engine and restartonly when you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not re-quire extended warm-up. After the en-gine has started, allow the engine to runfor 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing thevehicle in gear. In very cold weather,

however, give your engine a slightlylonger warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in too higha gear resulting in the engine bucking.If this happens, shift to a lower gear.Over-revving is racing the engine be-yond its safe limit. This can be avoided

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally,corners should always be taken undergentle acceleration. If you follow thesesuggestions, tire wear will be held to aminimum.



yby shifting at the recommended speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. Theair conditioning system is operated byengine power so your fuel economy isreduced when you use it.


17

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol

Coolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qual-ity ethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubricatesthe water pump and prevents freezing. Besure to replace or replenish your coolant inaccordance with the maintenance sched-ule in Section 5. Before winter, have yourcoolant tested to assure that its freezingpoint is sufficient for the temperatures an-ticipated during the winter.

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires or to installtire chains on your tires. If snow tires areneeded, it is necessary to select tiresequivalent in size and type of the originalequipment tires. Failure to do so may ad-versely affect the safety and handling ofyour car. Furthermore, speeding, rapidacceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very haz-

ardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake applica-tions on snowy or icy roads may causeskids to occur. You need to keep sufficientdistance between the vehicle in operationin front and your vehicle. Also, apply thebrake gently. It should be noted that install-

C160F02A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs and replace themif necessary. Also check all ignition wiringand components to be sure they are notcracked, worn or damaged in any way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if

Necessary

In some climates it is recommended that alower viscosity "winter weight" oil be usedduring cold weather. See Section 9 forrecommendations. If you aren't sure whatweight oil you should use, consult yourHyundai dealer.



Winter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect the battery

and cables as described in Section 6. Thelevel of charge in your battery can bechecked by your Hyundai dealer or a ser-vice station.

brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide agreater driving force, but will not prevent

side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before fitting tirechains.


18

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate

Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice canbuild up under the fenders and interferewith the steering. When driving in severewinter conditions where this may happen,you should periodically check underneaththe car to be sure the movement of the frontwheels and the steering components isnot obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weatherwhere you drive your car, you should carryappropriate emergency equipment. Someof the items you may want to carry include

C160G01A-GAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into thekey opening. If a lock is covered with ice,squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid toremove the ice. If the lock is frozen inter-nally, you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heated keywith care to avoid injury.

NOTE:

The proper temperature for using theimmobilizer key is from -40°F (-40°C) to176°F (80°C). If you heat the immobilizerkey over 176°F (80°C) to open the frozenlock, it may cause damage to the tran-sponder in its head.

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-

Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on the con-tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is avail-able from Hyundai dealers and most autoparts outlets. Do not use engine coolant orother types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the paint finish.

C160I01L-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is an



tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight,emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper

cables, a window scraper, gloves, groundcloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

y ppaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes are

wet. If there is a risk the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while youput the gear selector lever in "P" and blockthe rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Thenrelease the parking brake.


19

!

!

WARNING:

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct op-eration and always keep them clean. Whendriving during the day in conditions of poorvisibility, it is helpful to drive with head-lights on low beam. This enables you to beseen, as well as to see.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to speci-fication. Low tire inflation pressures willresult in overheating and possible failureof the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

NOTE:

Never exceed the maximum tire infla-tion pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires can

cause poor handling, loss of vehiclei f i

o Driving on tires with no or insufficienttread is dangerous. Worn-out tirescan result in loss of vehicle control,collisions, injury, and even death.Worn-out tires should be replaced assoon as possible and should never beused for driving. Always check tiretread before driving your car.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget to checkboth engine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resulti h ti f th i



control, and sudden tire failure lead-ing to accidents, injuries, and even

death. Always check tires are prop-erly inflated before driving.

in overheating of the engine.


20

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combina-tion, making sure that its location is com-patible with that of the trailer or vehiclebeing towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch whichdistributes the tongue load uniformlythroughout the chassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to thecar and installed by a qualified technician.

DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FORTEMPORARY INSTALLATION ANDNEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHESONLY TO THE BUMPER.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOW-ING

!

C190A01TG-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car,you should first check with your State'sDepartment of Motor Vehicles to deter-mine their legal requirements.Since laws vary from State to State therequirements for towing trailers, cars, orother types of vehicles or apparatus maydiffer. Ask your Hyundai dealer for furtherdetails before towing.

CAUTION:o Do not do any towing with your car

during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km)in order to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine ortransaxle damage.

o Whentowing a trailer be sure to con-

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it is prop-erly installed and operating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. See MaintenanceUnder Severe Usage Conditions" on

page 5-6.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades

(in excess of 6%) pay close attention

!



o When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Hyundai dealer for furtherinformation on additional require-ments such as a towing kit, etc.

(in excess of 6%) pay close attentionto the engine coolant temperaturegauge to ensure the engine does not

overheat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves across thedial towards "H" (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as it is safe to do so, andallow the engine to idle until it coolsdown. You may proceed once theengine has cooled sufficiently.


21

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

2. The total gross vehicle weight with

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight

in the back than in the front. About60% of the trailer load should be in thefront half on the trailer and the remain-ing 40% in the rear.

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yourcar and the trailer or vehicle you are towingfail, the trailer or vehicle could wanderdangerously across other lanes of trafficand ultimately leave the roadway. To elimi-nate this potentially dangerous situation,safety chains, attached between your carand the trailer or towed vehicle, are re-quired in most states.

C190E01TG-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the totaltrailer load.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-d b di ib i h l d i

C190E01JM

x 100 = 10% (MAX)Total trailer weight



trailer must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown

on the vehicle identification plate (seepage 8-2). The total gross vehicleweight is the combined weight of thevehicle, driver, all passengers andtheir luggage, cargo, hitch, trailertongue load and other optional equip-ment.

creased by re-distributing the load inthe trailer.

This can be verified by checking thetotal weight of the loaded trailer andthen checking the load on the tongue.


22

!

lbs(kg)

! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed thevalues in the chart below.

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steer-ing and braking performance causinga crash which could cause seriousinjury or death.

o Towing a trailer affects vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when brak-

ing.o Be careful when driving in slipperyand windy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and whiledriving up and down hills.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identi-fication plate (see page 8-2). It is pos-sible that your towing package doesnot exceed the GVWR but exceedsthe GAWR. Improper trailer loadingand/or too much luggage in the trunk can overload the rear axle. Redistrib-ute the load and check the axle weightagain.

C190F01TG-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safetychain connections as well as properoperation of the trailer running lights,brake lights, and turn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal conditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiencyand electrical charging performance,

do not tow a trailer with the transaxleengaged in overdrive gear.

5. Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressureof all tires on the trailer and your car.Low tire pressure can seriously affectthe handling. Also check the spare tire.

7 Thevehicle/trailer combinationis more



Tongue200 (90)

-

With Brake

Without Brake

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer 2000 (900)

1000 (450)

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is moreaffected by crosswind and buffeting.

When being passed by a large vehicle,keep a constant speed and steerstraight ahead. If there is too muchwind buffeting, slow down to get out ofthe other vehicle's air turbulence.


23VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01TG-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

OTG050300N

Type A

Type B

8. When parking your car and trailer, es-pecially on a hill, be sure to follow all

the normal precautions. Turn your frontwheel into the curb, set the parkingbrake firmly, and put the transaxle inPark. In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving, andthen apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your elec-

trical connection at the same time.10. During your trip, check occasionally tobe sure that the load is secure, and thatthe lights and any trailer brakes are stillworking.

11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden accelera-tion or sudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lanechanges.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when tow-ing, (the temperature gauge reads nearred zone), taking the following actionmay reduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2 R d hi h d

!

15. If you have to stop while going uphill,do not hold the vehicle in place by

pressing on the accelerator. This cancause the automatic transaxle to over-heat. Use the parking brake orfootbrake.

NOTE:When towing, check transaxle fluid morefrequently.



OTG050301N

g13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, resultingin reduced braking efficiency.

14. When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brakingeffect.When ascending a long grade, down-shift the transaxle to a lower gear andreduce speed to reduce chances ofengine overloading and/or overheat-ing.

2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.

4. While in stop and go traffic, place thegear selector in park or neutral andidle the engine at a higher speed.


24

The tire label located on the driver's

side of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Vehicle capacity weight:860 lbs (390 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weight in-cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons

OTG050302N

Type C

Type D

However the seating capacity may be

reduced based upon the weight of all ofthe occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includingoccupants and cargo, the vehicle cancarry.

Towing capacity:

Towing capacity is the maximum trailerweight including its cargo weight, yourvehicle can tow. See the section "Traileror Vehicle Towing" for specificationsabout the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle will



Total: 5 persons(Front seat: 2 persons,

Rear seat: 3 persons)Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.

OTG050303N

The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of occupantsand the tongue load, if your vehicle isequipped with a trailer.


25

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

Example 1

Item

A

B

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

A B C

Steps For Determining Correct LoadLimit -1. Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.''on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb passengers inyourvehicle,theamountofavailable

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.



(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(489 kg)

B

C

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

your vehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)


26

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

Item

A

B

Description



A B C

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

Item

A

B

Description



Example 3

A B C

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading

information label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.



(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

B

C

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

B

C

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight


27

! WARNING:o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR andvehicle capacity weight. If you do,parts, including tires on your ve-hicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles and

braking ability. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.

C190G03JM-AAT

Certification Label

The certification label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.

C190G01A !

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident or



This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

vehicle damage. You can calcu-

late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehicle.Be careful not to overload yourvehicle.




29VEHICLE WEIGHT

This section will guide you in the properloading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within itsdesign rating capability, with or without atrailer. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehicledesign performance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms for determining your vehicle'sweight ratings, with or without a trailer,from the vehicle's specifications and thecertification label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle includinga full tank of fuel and all standard equip-ment. It does not include passengers, cargo,or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle(front and rear) - including vehicle curbweight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight thatcan be carried by a single axle (front orrear). These numbers are shown on thecertification label.The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actualCargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of



s s t e e g t o you e e c e eyou picked it up from your dealer plus any

aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to theBase Curb Weight, including cargo andoptional equipment.

gthe fully loaded vehicle (including all op-

tions, equipment, passengers and cargo).The GVWR is shown on the certificationlabel located on the driver’s (or frontpassenger’s) door sill.

If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 3-5Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-9If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-11

Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-12If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed................................... 3-16Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-17If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-18 3


3



32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOTSTART

!

D010A01A-AAT

D010B01TG-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns

Over Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but

Does Not Start1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check

all connectors at ignition, coil and sparkplugs. Reconnect any that may be dis-connected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualified

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result ina collision or cause other damage. Inaddition, push or pull starting may causethe catalytic converter to be overloadedand create a fire hazard.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dimsor goes out when you operate the starter,the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it.See instructions for "Jump Starting".

F020100AUN-EU

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad orCrossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or cross-ing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral)position and then push the vehicle to a safeplace.



Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified

assistance.

1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"or "P" and the emergency brake is set.

OTG070011

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immediately

remove any contaminated clothing andflush the area with clean water for atleast 15 minutes. Then promptly obtainmedical attention. If you must be trans-ported to an emergency facility, con-tinue to apply water to the affected areawith a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly explo-sive. Do not smoke or allow a spark oran open flame in the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you cannotdetermine that it is a 12-volt battery, donot attempt to use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a dischargedbattery, follow this procedure exactly:

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly explo-sive. If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personal injuryand damage to the vehicle may occur! If

t h t f ll thi

HTG4001

Booster

battery

Dischargedbattery

1. If the booster battery is installed in an-other vehicle, be sure the two vehicles

are not touching.2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

acces-sories in both vehicles.3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in

the exact location shown on the illustra-tion. First, attach one clamp of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe discharged battery.Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cable ofthe booster battery. Next, using the othercable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery.Then attach the other end of that cableto a solid metal part of the engine of thevehicle with the discharged batteryaway from the battery. Do not connectthe cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a few

i t Thi ill h l t th tth



you are not sure how to follow this proce-

dure, seek qualified assistance. Auto-mobile batteries contain sulfuric acid.This is poisonous and highly corrosive.When jump starting, wear protectiveglasses and be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on the car.

minutes. This will help to assure that the

booster battery is fully charged. Duringthe jumping operation, run the enginein this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal start-ing procedure. After the engine starts,carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.




5

!

6. If you cannot find the cause of the over-heating, wait until the engine tempera-

ture has returned to normal. Then, ifcoolant has been lost, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir to bring the fluidlevel in the reservoir up to the halfwaymark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call a Hyundaidealer for assistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there isa leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

C320A01TG

C320A01TG-AAT

(If Installed)

➀ Low Tire Pressure Telltale➁ TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthly whencold and inflated to the inflation pres-sure recommended by the vehicle manu-

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-tale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure even if



y

facturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you should de-termine the proper tire inflation pres-sure for those tires.)

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.




7

! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contrib-ute to loss of vehicle control andincreased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-toring System) Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator comeson and stays on when there is a problemwith the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem. If the system is able to correctlydetect an under-inflation warning at thesame time as system failure then it willilluminate both the TPMS malfunction

and the low tire pressure telltale e.g. ifFront Left sensor fails, the TPMS mal-function indicator comes on, but if FrontRight, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire isunder-inflated, the low tire pressure tell-tale may come on with the TPMS mal-function indicator.Have the system checked by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of the

CAUTION:o The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if the vehicleis moving around electric powersupply cables or radio transmit-ters such as police stations, gov-ernment and public offices, broad-casting stations, military installa-tions, airports, or transmitting tow-ers, etc. which can interfere with

normal operation of the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS).

o The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if snow chainsare used or some separate elec-tronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remotestarter or GPS or navigation etc.,are used in the vehicle. This can

!



sible to determine the cause of the

problem. interfere with normal operation ofthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS).

38


CAUTION:o Do not use any tire sealant if your

vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

o In order for the system to correctlymonitor tires for under-inflation,there should be a total of exactly 4sensors fitted to each of the fourdriven wheel positions. Thereshould be no other sensors in thevehicle including spare tire sincethis could cause the system tomonitor the wrong sensors.

!

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Have theflat tire repaired by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible or replacethe flat tire with the temporary sparetire.

NOTE:NEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a low

pressure tire. If used, you will haveto replace the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside the tirebehind the valve stem. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It is recom-mended that you always have your tiresserviced by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible

Once the low pressure tire is re-inflatedto the recommended pressure and in-

stalled on the vehicle, the TPMS mal-function indicator and the low tire pres-sure telltale will extinguish within a fewminutes of driving. If the low pressureand TPMS malfunction indicators arenot extinguished after about 20 minutesof continuous driving, please visit anauthorized Hyundai dealer.You may not be able to identify a low tire

by simply looking at it. Always use agood quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.Please note that a tire that is hot (frombeing driven) will have a higher pres-sure measurement than a tire that iscold (from sitting stationary for at least3 hours and driven less than 1 mileduring that 3 hour period). Allow the tireto cool before measuring the inflation



as soon as possible.After you replace the low pressure tirewith the temporary spare tire, the TPMSmalfunction indicator may illuminateand the low tire pressure telltale mayilluminate because the temporary sparetire does not have a sensor.

g

pressure.Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pressure.A cold tire means the vehicle has beensitting for 3 hours and driven for lessthan 1 mile in that 3 hour period.


9

!

!

!

WARNING:Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability to

WARNING - TPMSo The TPMS cannot alert you to se-

vere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors such asnails or road debris.

o If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force, and

slowly move to a safe position offthe road.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired op-eration.

WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

SPARE TIRE

D040A03GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

(If Installed)The following instructions for the TEM-PORARY spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/80D16

420 kPa(60 psi)

Spare Tire Pressure

2. The spare tire should only be used



warn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.

temporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

310


CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.o When the original tire and wheel

are repaired and reinstalled on the

vehicle, the wheel nut torque mustbe set correctly to prevent wheelvibration. The correct wheel nuttightening torque is 65~79lb-ft(9~11kg.m).

! ! WARNING:The temporary spare tire is for emer-gency use only. Do not operate yourvehicle on this temporary spare atspeeds over 50 mph (80 km/h). Theoriginal tire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possible toavoid failure of the spare possiblyleading to personal injury or death.

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, it

should not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.




11IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D050A01TG-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the car slow down while drivingstraight ahead. Do not apply the brakesimmediately or attempt to pull off theroad as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the car has slowed tosuch a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.

Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on firm, level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the twotraffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxle in"P".

D040B01TG-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

1. Open the trunk lid.2. Remove the luggage mat.3. Take out the tool receptacle.

HNF4008

4. Turn the installation bolt counter-clockwise to remove the spare tire.

5. After replacing the spare tire, install

Spare Tire Pressure

D040A01TG-AAT

FULL SIZE SPARE TIRE (If Installed)

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodicallychecked and maintained at the speci-fied pressure while the tire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

Full Size

210 kPa (30 psi)



3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire according to the in-structions provided as follows.

and tighten the bolt firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play inthe spare tire.

312


CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

D060A01TG-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-

ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, followthis procedure:

1. Park on a level surface and firmlyapply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever into P (park).3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

ers.

D060B01NF-GAT

4. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

7D060B01NF-A

Take out the tool receptacle and turnthe installation bolt counterclockwiseto remove spare tire from the trunk.

D060C01A-AAT

5. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on the jack.

HTG4009

Flat tire




13

D060F02E-AAT

8. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.

If th j k i ft d d

OTG060101Wrench bar

D060E01A-AAT

7. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

1JBA6025

Wheel nutwrench

D060D01A-AAT

6. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrench

th h dl i t th l ft h i

OTG060100



If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to remove

the flat tire.

so the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

314


!WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

D060G02Y-AAT

9. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jiggle

the wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that prevents the wheel fromfitting solidly against the hub.

If there is not good contact on themounting surface between the wheeland hub, the wheel nuts could comeloose and cause the loss of a wheel.Loss of a wheel may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. This may causeserious injury or death.




15

D060I01E-AAT

11. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct.Always reinstall the valve cap afterchecking or adjusting tire pressure. If

the cap is not replaced, air may leakfrom the tire. If you lose a valve cap,buy another and install it as soon aspossible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extension pipeover the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Then

double check each nut for tightnessAf h i h l h h i

OTG060103

D060H02O-AAT

10. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.



Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

double-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

OTG060102

316


D080B01TG-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

D080B01TG

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift

type truck (1) (2) or flatbed equipment (3)

1)

2)

3) dolly

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be

done by your Hyundai dealer or a commer-cial tow truck service. This will help assurethat your vehicle is not damaged in towing.Also, professionals are generally aware oflocal laws governing towing. In any case,rather than risk damage to your car, it issuggested that you show this informationto the tow truck operator. Be sure that asafety chain system is used and that alllocal laws are observed.

It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbedequipment with all the wheels off theground.

!CAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towedincorrectly!

o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.

o Whentheenginewillnotstart besurethe steering is unlocked by placing

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take carenot to cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

D080B02TG

!

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.



type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).o When the engine will not start, be surethe steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position.


17

!1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, be sure the park-

ing brake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the automatictransaxle for fluid leaks under your ve-hicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid isleaking, flatbed equipment or a towingdolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the frontwheels on the ground, use a towingdolly under the front wheels. D080B03TG

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxleshould never be towed from the rear withthe front wheels on the ground. This cancause serious damage to the transaxle.Be sure to use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

D080D04A-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWING

OTG060105

Front

Rear



3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

OTG060106

For emergency towing when no commer-cial tow vehicle is available, attach a towcable, chain or strap to the towing hookunder the front/rear of your car.

318


Do not attempt to tow your vehicle in thismanner on any unpaved surface. This

could result in serious damage to your car.Nor should towing be attempted if thewheels, drive train, axles, steering orbrakes are damaged. Before towing, besure the transaxle is in neutral and the keyis in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the"ON" position (with the engine running). Adriver must be in the towed car to steer itand operate the brakes.

CAUTION :o If the car is being towed with all four

wheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that thetransaxle is in neutral. Be sure thesteering is unlocked by placing theignition switch in the ACC position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

o To avoid serious damage to the auto-matic transaxle, limit the vehicle

speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and driveless than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing.

o Before towing, check the automatictransaxle for fluid leaks under yourvehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluidis leaking, flatbed equipment or a tow-ing dolly must be used.

!

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A02A-AAT

Information about the key of immobilizer

system can be found on page 1-3.



4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. For ex-ample, corrosion is accelerated by highhumidity, particularly when temperaturesare just above freezing. In such conditions,the corrosive material is kept in contactwith the car surfaces by moisture that isslow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it isslow to dry and holds moisture in contactwith the vehicle. Although the mud ap-pears to be dry, it can still retain the mois-ture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is particu-larly important to keep your car clean andfree of mud or accumulations of othermaterials. This applies not only to the vis-ible surfaces but particularly to the under-

side of the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion onyour car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is al-lowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

o Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-rosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the highestquality. However, this is only part of the job.To achieve the long-term corrosion resis-tance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner'scooperation and assistance is also re-quired.



4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car in thegarage or drive it into the garage when it isstill wet or covered with snow, ice or mud.Even a heated garage can contribute tocorrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside of thecar is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car atleast once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winteris over.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the componentsunder the fenders and other areas thatare hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulatedmud rather than washing it away willaccelerate corrosion rather than pre-

vent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in re-

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

TO HELP PREVENT COR-ROSION



steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corro-sive materials.

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.




5

After rinsing, dry the car using a dampchamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The rea-son for drying the car is to remove waterfrom the car so it will dry without waterspots. Don't rub, this can damage the fin-ish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in thepaint, use touch-up paint to cover them toprevent corrosion. To protect the paintworkof the car against corrosion, you mustclean your Hyundai (at least once a month).Give special attention

to the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of thesplashboards of the car. Make sure that theoutlets and the underside of the doors areopen. Paint damage can be caused bysmall accumulation of tar, industrial pre-cipitation, tree resin, insects and bird drop-pings, when not removed immediately. Ifwater alone is not strong enough to re-move the accumulated dirt, use a mild car

washing solution. Be sure to rinse thesurface after washing to remove the solu-ti N ll th l ti t d th

! CAUTION:

o Water washing in the engine compart-ment including high pressure waterwashing may cause the failure of elec-trical circuits located in the enginecompartment.

o Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/elec-

tronic components inside the vehicleas this may damage them.

OJB037800

! CAUTION:o Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlight orwhen the body of the vehicle is warm.

o Be careful when washing the sidewindows of your vehicle. Especially,with high-pressure water, water mayleak through the windows and wet theinterior.

o To prevent damage to the plastic parts

and lamps, do not clean with chemicalsolvents or strong detergents.



tion. Never allow the solution to dry on thepainted surfaces.

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6 CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather uphol-stered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must becleaned off or it may work into the surface

of the leather, causing damage.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the sur-face to loosen the dirt, then wipe with aclean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this proce-dure until the upholstery is clean. Do notuse gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or otherstrong cleaners.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed topreserve the appearance of the bumperson your Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyteor hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers.If you do, wash it off immediately withclean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumpersurfaces. They are made of soft plasticand the surface can be damaged ifmistreated. Do not use abrasive clean-ers. Use warm water and mild soap orcar-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car againwhen water no longer beads on a cleansurface but spreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier betweenyour paint and contaminate. Keeping agood coat of wax on your vehicle will helpprotect it.Always wash and dry the car before polish-ing or waxing or using a combinationcleaner and wax. Use a good quality com-

mercial product and follow themanufacturer's directions on the container.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or cor-rosive cleaning agents. These can dam-age the finish of the car. To remove roadtar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Begentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, usewarm water and mild soap or car-washingsolution. Soak the spot and rub gently. Ifthe paint has lost its luster, use a commer-cial car-cleaning polish.



p p yyour car repainted, do not leave thebumpers on the car if the car is going tobe placed in a high-temperature paintbooth.

Polish and wax the bright trim pieces aswell as the paint.


7

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergent andwarm water. Do not use strong detergents,dye, bleach or abrasive materials on theseat belts as this may weaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them forexcessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs

of damage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleanersof this type are available in aerosol cans inliquid form or powder. Read the instruc-tions and follow them exactly. Using avacuum cleaner with the appropriate at-tachment, remove as much dirt from thecarpets as possible. Apply the foam follow-ing the manufacturer's directions, then rubin overlapping circles. Do not add water.These cleaners work best when the carpetis kept as dry as possible.

ANY QUESTIONS?

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care ofyour car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washing leatherthoroughly with soap and water will keepyour leather lustrous, beautiful and ensureyou have many years of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using anymild soap and lukewarm water, work up agood lather. Thoroughly wash the leather.Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth anddry with soft cloth. Do this as often as theleather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils

are incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life of theleather. Oil applied to the finished surfacewill in no way help the leather and may domore harm than good. Varnishes and fur-niture polishes should never be used un-der any conditions.

! CAUTION:When cleaning leather products (steer-ing wheel seatsetc ) useneutral deter-



E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However, whencleaning the inside of the rear window becareful not to damage the rear windowdefroster wiring.

ing wheel, seats etc.), use neutral deter-gents or low alcohol content solutions. Ifyou use high alcohol content solutionsor acid/alkaline detergents, the color ofthe leather may fade or the surface mayget stripped off.

5

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5



5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTS

F020A02Y-AAT

o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demon-strate compliance with conditions of theemissions system warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow theprescribed maintenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you shouldperform when you drive your Hyundai oryou fill the fuel tank. A list of these items willbe found on page 6-3.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a fewtools that are required and want to take the

time to do so, you can inspect and servicea number of items. For more informationabout doing it yourself, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-viced, keep copies of the service recordsin your glove box. This will help ensurethat you can document that the requiredprocedures have been performed tokeep your warranties in effect. This isespecially important when service isnot performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own mainte-nance and repairs, you may find it

helpful to have an official Hyundai ShopManual. A copy of this publication maybe purchased at your Hyundai dealer'sparts department.



5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B03TG-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicleemission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whicheveroccurs first.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARANCE See Note *1

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

R

R

I

37.5

60

30

R

I

I

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

I

I

60

96

48

I

I

I

R

I

R

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

I

I

75

120

60

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

R

R

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

I

I

105

168

84

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

I

I

I

I

120

192

96

I

I

I

R

I

R

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

I

I

I

150

240

120

R

I

I

I

R

R

I

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 10 years



Note:

*1. Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.


5

142.5

228

114

I

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

F030C02TG-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT *1

COOLANT *3

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS

PARKING BRAKE

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS

/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING FLUID

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

I

60

96

48

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

I

105

168

84

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

I

150

240

120

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Note:*1. The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

No check, No service required

120

192

96

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note *2

See Note *4

See Note *5



*2. At first, inspect the drive belt at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months.

After that, inspect it every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months.

*3. When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.

An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.*4. At first, replace the coolant at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months.

After that, replace it every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.*5. Replace every 10,000 miles (15,000 km) or 12 months.


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A03TG-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart belowfor the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, H

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in

normal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing tem-peratureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC D i i h d dd d l d l d

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI D i i t l t i th i l hi l



C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spreadroads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very coldweather

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicletowing

J - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Con-nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Have atrained technician replace any damagedor leaking parts immediately.

F060B01NF-GAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturationand replace if necessary. Drive belts shouldbe checked periodically for proper ten-sion.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changedat the intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil andfilter changes are required.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which

the vehicle may be driven, damage theemission system and cause hard starting.If an excessive amount of foreign matteraccumulates in the fuel tank, the filter mayrequire replacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaks atthe connections. Fuel filters should beinstalled by trained technicians.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heat

source, sharp edges or moving compo-nent which might cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hose con-nections, such as clamps and couplings,to make sure they are secure, and that noleaks are present. Hoses should be re-placed immediately if there is any evi-dence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS




8

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between

"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chaf-ing, cracks, deterioration and any leak-age. Replace any deteriorated or dam-aged parts immediately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid should not bechecked under normal usage conditions.But in severe conditions, the fluid shouldbe changed at an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance to the scheduledmaintenance at the beginning of this chap-ter.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. Make sure thata new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or en-gine vibration and adjust if necessary. Aqualified technician should perform the

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-cally red.As the vehicle is driven, the automatictransaxle fluid will begin to look darker.It is normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace the fluid basedupon the changed color.

CAUTION:The use of a non-specified fluid couldresult in transaxle malfunction and fail-ure.Use only specified automatic transaxlefluid. (Refer to “Lubrication chart” insection 9.)

!



q poperation.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, mufflerand hangers for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Start the engine and listen care-

fully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as neces-sary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Check

air conditioning performance according tothe relevant shop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage. Re-place any damaged parts and, if neces-sary, repack the grease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt andHoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses

for leakage and damage. Replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.Inspect the power steering belt for evi-

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Up-per Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage.Replace any damaged parts.

F070H01TG-AAT

o Rear Disc Brake / Pads, Parking Brake

Check the rear disc brake and pads forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parkingbrake system including the parking brakepedal and cables. For detailed serviceprocedures, refer to the Shop Manual.



p p gdence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,oiliness and proper tension. Replace oradjust it if necessary.


10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATENOTICE

F080A01NF-AAT

Perchlorate Material-special handling mayapply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, such asairbag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners andkeyless remote entry batteries, must bedisposed of according to Title 22 Califor-nia Code of Regulations Section 67384.10(a).



6

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks............................................................ 6-3Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-6Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-8Windshield Wiper Blades .............................................. 6-8

Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-12Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-14Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-14Checking Parking Brake Pedal ................................... 6-16Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-16Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-19Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-21Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-22

Bulb Wattage ............................................................... 6-29Fuse Panel Description............................................... 6-30

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6



6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010A01TG-AAT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OTG079102

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle tools

and other heavy objects care-fully so that the plastic cover ofthe engine is not damaged.

!

1. Coolant reservoir cap ................ 6-72 Engine oil filler cap 6 5

5. Fuse and relay box .................. 6-166 Windshield washer fluid

8. Engine oil level dipstick ............. 6-59 Radiator cap 6 6



2. Engine oil filler cap .................... 6-53. Air cleaner .................................. 6-84. Brake fluid reservoir ................. 6-13

6. Windshield washer fluidreservoir ................................... 6-12

7. Power steering fluid reservoir .. 6-21

9. Radiator cap .............................. 6-610. Battery ...................................... 6-19

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G020C01TG-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked eachtime when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation

(and air conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operation

o Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking

brakeo Automatic transaxle operation, includ-

ing "Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sun visor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning cor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assis-tance from your Hyundai dealer if serviceis needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock condition

o Tire pressure and condition(including spare tire)

GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regu-larly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid level

o Battery conditiono Air cleaner filter condition




4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet thefollowing classification.

API Service SM* or above,ILSAC GF 4 or above

G030B01JM-U

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performanceand service of the engine. It is suggested

that you check the oil level at least once aweek in normal use and more often if youare on a trip or driving in severe conditions.

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS

!G020D01TG-GAT

Improper or incomplete service may resultin problems. This section gives instruc-

tions only for the maintenance items thatare easy to perform.Several procedures should be done by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:Improper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warrantycoverage.

WARNING:

o Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. You can beseriously injured while performingsome maintenance procedures. If youlack sufficient knowledge and experi-ence or the proper tools and equip-ment to do the work, have it done by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o Working under the hood with the en-gine running is dangerous. It becomes

even more dangerous when you wearjewelry or loose clothing. These canbecome entangled in moving partsand result in injury. Therefore, if youmust run the engine while workingunder the hood, make certain that youremove all jewelry (especially rings,bracelets, watches, and necklaces)and all neckties, scarves, and similarloose clothing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.



ILSAC GF-4 or above

* If the API service SM engine oil is notavailable in your country, you are ableto use API service SL.


5

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the en-gine to the normal operating temperatureand be sure your car is parked on levelground. Turn the engine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dip-stick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstickand withdraw it again. Then note the high-est level the oil has reached on the dip-stick. It should be between the upper ("F")and lower ("L") range.

!

OTG079004

G030D03TG-AAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the "L"mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.To add oil:

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it

OTG079103

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as itmay be hot enough to burn you.

NOTE:For better fuel economy, it is recom-mended to use the engine oil of a viscos-ity grade SAE 5W-20 (API Service SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is

not available in your country, select theproper engine oil using the engine oilviscosity chart.



1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Donot overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.


6 CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure andmay erupt through the opening if the capis removed. You could be seriouslyburned if you do not observe this precau-tion. Do not remove the radiator cap until

the radiator is cool to the touch.

!

NOTE:o It is recommended that the engine oil

and filter should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o Always dispose of used engine oil inan environmentally acceptable man-

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION

65 WARNING:Engine oil contains chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer,birth defects, and reproductive harm.Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact withthe skin for prolonged periods of time.Always protect your skin by washingyour hands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possible after

handling used oil.

!

! CAUTION:o Slowly pour the recommended oil into

a funnel. Do not overfill to avoid dam-age to the engine.

o Do not spill engine oil, when adding orchanging engine oil. If you drop theengine oil on the engine room, wipe itoff immediately.

NOTE:It is recommended that theenginecool

The distance between the "F" and "L" marksis equal to about 1 quart of oil.

OTG070010

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.



y pner. It is suggested that it be placed ina sealed container and taken to aservice station for reclamation. Donot pour the oil on the ground or put itinto the household trash.

It is recommended that the engine cool-ant should be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.


7

!

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

When adding coolant, use only deionized

water or soft water for your vehicle andnever mix hard water in the coolant filled atthe factory. An improper coolant mixturecan result in serious malfunction or enginedamage.Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolantin a 50/50 mix with water. The enginecoolant should be compatible with alumi-num engine parts. Additional corrosioninhibitors or additives should not be used.

The cooling system must be maintainedwith the correct concentration and type ofengine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentrationof antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or gobelow the 35% level, or damage to thecooling system may result. For proper con-centration when adding or replacing theengine coolant, refer to the following table.

G050C01TG-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the sideof the plastic coolant reservoir. The level ofthe coolant should be between the "L" and"F" lines on the reservoir when the engineis warm with it at idle . If the level is belowthe "L" mark, add engine coolant to bringit up to "F". If the level is low, inspect forcoolant leaks and recheck the fluid levelfrequently. If the level drops again, visit

your Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

OTG078004

!CAUTION:

o Engine coolant can damage the finishof your car. If you spill engine coolanton the car, wash it off thoroughly withclean water.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.Do not use hard water. Hard water can

cause engine damage from corro-sion, overheating or freezing.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolantfan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine coolanttemperature decreases, the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a normal

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15) 65%35%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration



tomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

60%

50%

40%

40%

50%

60%


8

CAUTION:

o Operating your vehicle without usinga proper air cleaner filter in place canresult in excessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter,be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may resultin damage to the air cleaner filter.

!

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of the air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be

lifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.

HTG5013

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully in-spected from time to time and cleaned toremove accumulations of road film or otherdebris. To clean the wiper blades andarms, use a clean sponge or cloth with amild soap or detergent and water. If thewipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundaireplacement parts or their equivalent.

1JBA5122




10

Replacing passenger's side wind-shield wiper blade

1. Place the windshield wiper switch to the"OFF" position, raise the windshieldwiper arm about 10 mm from the wind-shield as illustrated.

NOTE:Be careful not to scratch the windshieldwiper arm against the hood.

G080B01TG

To install the wiper blade

HHR5050

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end ofthe wiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall againstthe windshield.

HHR5051

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiperarm and lower the wiper blade at thelevel of the wiper arm as shown in thedrawing.




11

2. Remove the windshield wiper bladewith the "LOCK" lever pressed.

G080B02TG G080B04TG

1. Turn the ignition switch "ON" and placethe windshield wiper switch to the "LO"position. Turn the ignition switch "OFF"when the windshield wiper is in the fullyup position. The windshield wiper willstop as illustrated.

2. Replace the wiper blade as describedin the section of the driver's side re-placement.

NOTE:

Remove any dirt or ice on the windshieldbefore turning on the wipers. Damage tothe wiper blade rubber and windshieldcould occur.

G080B03TG

3. Replace with a new wiper blade.Alternatively, you can replace the wind-shield wiper blade as follows.




12

CAUTION:

o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)should not be used in the washer sys-tem because it will damage the car'sfinish.

o The washer lever should not be pulledand the washer should not be oper-ated if the washer reservoir is empty.This can damage the washer fluidpump.

!

!WARNING:

o Windshield washer fluid agents con-tain some amounts of alcohol and canbe flammable under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparks or flameto contact the washer fluid or thewasher fluid reservoir. Damage tothe vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonousto humans and animals. Do not drink windshield washer fluid. Serious in-jury or death could occur.

FILLING THE WASHERRESERVOIR

G090A02NF-AAT

OTG078006

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid tothe windshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should beused to fill the washer reservoir. The fluidlevel should be checked more frequentlyduring bad weather or whenever thewasher system is in more frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2U.S. quarts (4.0 liters).

CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. It will also damage yourvehicle's paint if spilled on it and notremoved immediately.

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to thesafe operation of the car, it is suggestedthat they be checked and inspected byyour Hyundai dealer. The brakes shouldbe checked and inspected for wear atthose intervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in Section 5.

!




13

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir

should be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"marks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, care-fully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do notoverfill.

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to remainopen any longer than required. This will

prevent entry of dirt and moisture whichcan damage the brake system and causeimproper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt,then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowlypour the recommended fluid into the res-

ervoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace thecap on the reservoir and tighten.

HTG5015




14 CHANGING THE CLIMATECONTROL AIR FILTER

B145A01TG-AAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)

The climate control air filter is located in the

upper portion of the blower fan.It helps to decrease the amount of pollut-ants entering the car.

1. Open the glove box.2. Pull the glove box cylinder to unlock the

glove box retainer.

HTG2167

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and en-

gine radiator) should be checked periodi-cally for accumulation of dirt, dead insects,leaves, etc. These can interfere with maxi-mum cooling efficiency. When removingsuch accumulations, brush or hose themaway carefully to avoid bending the cool-ing fans.

Checking the amount of air condi-tioner refrigerant and compressorlubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, theperformance of the air conditioning is re-duced. Overfilling also has a negativeimpact on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation is found,have the system inspected by an autho-rized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTE:

It is important when servicing the airconditioning system that the correct typeand amount of oil and refrigerant is used.Otherwise, damage to the compressorand abnormal system operation mayoccur.

!WARNING:

The air conditioning system should beserviced by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer. Improper service may causeserious injury to the person performingthe service.




16

!CAUTION:

When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Neveruse a piece of wire or a higher-ratedfusible link. This could result in seriousdamage and create a fire hazard.

The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for proper stroke. If

you feel loose in the parking brake pedalwhen the parking brake is engaged, haveyour parking brake adjusted by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

CHECKING PARKINGBRAKE PEDAL

G185A01TG-GAT

CAUTION:If the parking brake pedal is not adjustedproperly, the vehicle may roll backwardswhen parking on a steep hill.

!

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical cir-cuits from the battery are ever overloaded,thus preventing damage to the entire wir-ing harness. (This could be caused by ashort in the system drawing too much cur-rent.) If this ever happens, have a Hyundaidealer determine the cause, repair thesystem and replace the fusible link. Thefusible links are located in a relay box in the

engine compartment for easy inspection.

HNF4004

CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES

!WARNING - Fuse replacement

Never install a wire or aluminum foilinstead of the proper fuse - even as atemporary repair. It may cause exten-sive wiring damage and a possible fire.




17

G200B01NF-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

G200B01TG-A

The fuse box for the lights and other elec-trical accessories will be found on the leftside of the instrument panel. Inside the boxyou will find a list showing the circuitsprotected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown (open)fuse could be the reason. If the fuse hasopened, you will see that the metal strip

inside the fuse has melted through. If yoususpect a blown fuse, follow this proce-dure:

G200B02L

Good Open-Replace3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even ifyou find one that appears to have

opened.

G200B02NF

1. Turn off the ignition and all otherswitches.

2. Open the fuse box and examine each

fuse. Remove each fuse by pulling ittoward you (a small "fuse puller" tool iscontained in the relay and fuse box ofthe engine room to simplify this opera-tion).

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing anew fuse of the same rating into place.The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not,

have the fuse clip repaired or replacedby a Hyundai dealer. If you do not havea spare fuse, you may be able to borrowa fuse of the same or lower rating froman accessory you can temporarily getalong without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always rememberto replace the borrowed fuse.




18

!CAUTION:

An open fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to aHyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair.Never replace a fuse with anything ex-cept a fuse with the same or a loweramperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.

NOTE:See page 6-30 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

G200C01CM-GAT

Power ConnectorNOTE:o If the power connector is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,will not operate. The following itemsmust be reset after replacement.- Digital Clock - Trip computer- Automatic heating and cooling con-

trol system- Audio

o Even when the power connector ispulled up, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

Your vehicle is equipped with a powerconnector to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without being oper-ated for prolonged periods. Use the follow-ing procedures before parking the vehiclefor prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover andpull up the power connector.

4. Insert the power connector in the oppo-site direction.

OTG079100




19CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When work-ing with batteries, carefully observe thefollowing precautions to avoid seriousinjuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poison-

ous and highly corrosive. Be careful not tospill it on yourself or the car. If you do spillbattery fluid on yourself, immediately dothe following:

OTG070011

!

G210B05A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of

corrosion around the battery posts or ter-minals should be removed using a solu-tion of household baking soda and warmwater. After the battery terminals are dry,cover them with a light coating of grease.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION65 WARNING:

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer, birth defectsand reproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer. Washhands after handling.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assis-

tance.o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse outyour eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth satu-rated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milkof magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink

vegetable oil. Get medical assistanceas soon as possible.

While batteries are being charged (eitherby a battery charger or by the vehicle'sgenerator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to preventinjuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well venti-

lated area.o Do not permit flames, sparks or smok-ing in the area.

o Keep children away from the area.




20

!!If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes withclean water for at least 15 min-utes and get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with asponge or cloth until medicalattention is received.If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.

If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical atten-tion immediately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near a bat-tery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.

An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful to theenvironment and humanhealth. Dispose the batteryaccording to your local law(s)

WARNING:! WARNING:

Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks awayfrom the battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-tery acid to contact your skin,eyes, clothing or paint finish.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case maycause battery acid to leak, resulting inpersonal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppositecorners.

o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.

o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.

Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignitionswitched on.

WARNING:



or regulation.


21POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL

G230A01TG-AAT

OTG078005

The power steering fluid level should bechecked regularly. To check the powersteering fluid level, be sure the engine is"OFF", then check to make certain that thepower steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on thefluid reservoir.

!

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan, so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine coolanttemperature decreases the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a normalcondition.

G220B01NF-GAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come onautomatically if the engine coolant tem-perature is high or whenever the air con-ditioning is in operation.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the powersteering hose connections for fluid leak-age at those intervals specified in the ve-hicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be re-placed if there is severe surface cracking,pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deteriora-tion of the hose could cause prematurefailure.

NOTE:o Grinding noise from the power steer-

ing pump may be heard immediately

after the engine is started in extremelycold conditions (below - 4°F). If thenoise stops during warm up, there isno abnormal function in the system. Itis due to a power steering fluid char-acteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

o Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

CHECKING ELECTRICCOOLING FANS




23

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protec-tion.

2. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

3. Always hold the bulb by its plastic base,avoid touching the glass.

Headlight

Headlight(High beam)

Headlight(Low beam)

OTG050101Front Fog Light

4. Remove the headlight bulb cover byturning it counterclockwise.

5. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

6 Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining

7. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly.

8. Install a new headlight bulb and snapthe headlight bulb retaining wire (highbeam) into position by aligning the wirewith the groove on the bulb.

9. Connect the headlight bulb socket-con-nector.

10.Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-ing it clockwise.

OEN076060N

OEN076051N

High beam

Low beam



6. Unsnap the headlight bulb retainingwire by depressing the end and push-ing it upward. (High beam)


24

G275A01TG-GAT

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

1. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

OTG070120

2. Turn the wheel inside until the wheelhousing is visible.

3. Remove the mounting screws of thecover with a phillips screwdriver andopen the cover

4. Take out the bulb from the bulb holderby turning it counterclockwise.

5. Install the new bulb.

HTG5046

! WARNING:o When removing/replacing halogen

bulbs, always handle the metal bodyof the bulb, not the glass. Residual oilmay cause the bulb to overheat andburst when lit.

o This halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shat-ter, resulting in flying fragments. Al-ways wear eye protection when ser-vicing the bulb. Protect the bulb againstabrasions or scratches and againstliquids when lighted. Turn the bulb ononly when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged orcracked. Keep the bulb out of the

G270A03O

Front Fog Light

NOTE:It is recommended that the front fog light

bulb should be replaced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.



open the cover.c ac ed eep e bu b ou o ereach of children and dispose of theused bulb with care.




26

3. To replace the back-up light, removethe socket by turning it counterclock-wise.

4. Install the new bulb.

G270C01TG-AAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the luggage compartment lightcover by pushing the knob.

OTG070113OTG040836

2. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunklid trim with a phillips screwdriver andremove the trunk lid trim.

Back-up Light

1. Open the trunk lid.

OTG070115




27

G270G01L-AAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

G270G01TG

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.

G270G02TG

G270C01MC

3. Replace with a new bulb.

G220200AEN

SIDE REPEATER LIGHT(If Installed)

If the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

OTG070102





28

G270K02TG

G270K01TG-AAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminated lightcover with a flat-head screwdriver.

G270K01TG

3. Replace with a new bulb.OTG070746L

OTG070747L

G270L01L-AAT

MAP LIGHT

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-head screwdriver.





29BULB WATTAGE

G280A01TG-AAT

OTG070101UOTG070100E

Part Name

Headlight (High/Low)

Front Turn Signal Light

Front Side Marker Light

Front Map Light

Interior Light

Front Fog LightSide Repeater Light (If Installed)

Door Courtesy Lamp

No.

1

2

3

4

5

67

8

Wattage

55/55

27

LED

10

10

35LED

5

Part Name

Rear Map Light

Stop/Tail Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Tail Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Side Marker LightRear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

No.

9

10

11

12

13

1415

16

17

Wattage

10

LED

LED

LED

5

LED27

16

5✽✽✽✽✽

Front Position Light-LED

Puddle Lamp (If Installed)-LED




30 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01TG-AAT

Engine Compartment

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When youinspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HTG4005




31

1

23

45

6789

1011

1213

1415

161718

192021

2223

24

HORN

TAILECU

IG1DRL

FR FOGA/CON

F/PUMPDIODE

ATMSTOP

H/LP LO RHS/ROOF

H/LP WASHERH/LP HI

ECU (B+)SNSR3SNSR1

SNSR2B/UP

IGN COIL

ECU (IG1)H/LP LO

ABS

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

ABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connectorABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connectorFuse(FR P/SEAT, T/LID, T/SIG, TILT, PEDAL, RR CURTAIN)

Defogger relayBlower relayFuse(P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH)

Start relay, Ignition switch(IG2, START)Engine control unit relay

Fuse(KEY SOL, ECS/RR FOG), Power connectorIgnition switch(ACC, IG1)

Fusible link(ABS1, ABS2, RR HTD, BLOWER)Horn relayTail light relayPCM

(Spare)Burglar alarm horn relay

Front fog light relayA/C Relay

Fuel pump relay(Spare)

ATM Control relayStop light switch

HID RelayOverhead console lamp

Headlight washer motorHeadlight relay (HIGH)

PCMInjector#1~#6, A/C Relay, Cooling fan relay

Mass air flow sensor, PCM, Immobilizer control module, Oil control valve#1/#2, Variable intake manifold valve

Oxygen Sensor#1~#4Back-up light switch, Stop light switch, Transaxle range switch, Vehicle speed sensorIgnition coil#1~#6, Condenser

PCMHeadlight relay(LOW)

ABS/ESC Control module, Multipurpose check connector

ABS1ABS2

I/P (B+)1

RR HTDBLOWERP/WDW

IGN2ECU RLY

I/P (B+)2IGN1

ALT

FUSE RATING

40A20A40A

40A40A40A

40A30A

30A30A

150A15A20A10A

10A15A

15A10A

20A-

20A15A

15A15A

20A20A

10A10A

15A

15A10A20A

10A20A

10A

DESCRIPTION

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE




32

G200E02TG-AAT

Inner Panel

OTG050100KS




33

FUSE RATING

20A

30A

10A

15A

10A

30A

30A

30A

10A

15A

10A

20A

15A10A

15A

15A

10A

10A

FUSE

T/LID

FR P/SEAT

AUDIO-2

AUDIO-1

START

P/WDW LH

P/WDW RH

RR P/SEAT

MODULE-1

PEDAL ADJ

MIRR HTD

KEY SOL

RR FOGA/BAG IND

A/BAG

TILT

TAIL LH

TAIL RH


Fuel lid opener & Trunk lid switch

Front lumbar support switch, IMS Control module, Driver/Passenger seat manual switch

ATM Key lock control module, Audio, IMS Switch, Accessory relay, Seat/Power outlet relay,

Digital clock & Passenger seat belt IND.

Audio

Transaxle range switch, Burglar alarm relay

Left front safety window module, Left rear power window switch

Right front safety window module, Right rear power window switch

Right rear ICM relay box

Instrument cluster, BCM, Rear curtain module, Rain sensor, IMS Control module, Power window main switch

Back warning buzzer

Left/Right outside mirror & mirror folding motor, A/C Control module

Key solenoid, Power window main switch

Rear fog light relayInstrument cluster

Air bag cut off switch, SRS Control module

Tilt & Telescopic module, Sport mode switch

Front fog light relay, Left rear combination light, License plate light, Left headlight

Right rear combination light, License plate light, Right headlight




34


Driver/Passenger seat warmer switch

Instrument cluster, ESC Switch, BCM, ATM Key lock control module, YAW Rate sensor,

Multi-function switch

A/C Control module, Tilt & Telescopic module, Rheostat, Electric chromic mirror, Overhead

console lamp

(Spare)

Cigarette lighter

BCM

PDM

Headlight relay, AQS & Ambient sensor, HID relay, Headlight leveling actuator

A/C Control module, Blower relay, A/C Control module(AUTO)

Data link connector, A/C Control module, Instrument cluster, Multi-function switch, Tilt &

Telescopic module, BCM, Door warning switch, Room lamp, Left/Right foot lamp, Door lamp

(Spare)Washer relay, Wiper relay(High), Wiper relay

Fuse(MEMORY, AUDIO-1)

FUSE RATING

10A

10A

10A

10A

20A

15A

10A

10A

10A

15A

15A25A

30A

FUSE

S/HTR

MODULE-2

A/CON

DIESEL

C/LIGHTER

T/SIG

PDM-1

H/LP

A/CON SW

MEMORY

PICWIPER

POWER CONN



7

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2

Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7



7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEMS

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control Sys-tem

The positive crankcase ventilation systemis employed to prevent air pollution causedby blow-by gases being emitted from thecrankcase. This system supplies fresh fil-tered air to the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase, the freshair mixes with blow-by gases, which thenpass through the PCV valve into the induc-tion system.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tankare absorbed and stored in the onboard

canister. When the engine is running, thefuel vapors absorbed in the canister aredrawn into the surge tank through thepurge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant tempera-ture is low during idling, the PCSV closes

so that evaporated fuel is not taken into theengine. After the engine warms-up duringordinary driving, the PCSV opens to intro-duce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all emissionregulations.

There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recom-mended that you have your car inspected

and maintained by an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance with the maintenanceschedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Mainte-nance Test (With Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, turn theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem off by pressing the ESC switch.

o After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-cluding ORVR: Onboard Refuel-ing Vapor Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control Sys-tem is designed to prevent fuel vapors fromescaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded

into a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuel va-pors into the atmosphere.)



7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A03A-AAT

(If Installed)

Hyundai vehicle is equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter toreduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained in theexhaust gas. Exhaust gases passingthrough the catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature. The

introduction of large amounts of unburnedgasoline into the exhaust may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and createa fire hazard. This risk may be reduced byobserving the following:

H010D02A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission ControlSystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls ex-haust emissions while maintaining goodvehicle performance.

! CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety ofautomobile components and parts, in-

cluding components found in the interiorfurnishings in a vehicle, contain or emitchemicals known to the State of Califor-nia to cause cancer and birth defectsand reproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehicles andcertain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

! WARNING - FireThe exhaust system and catalytic sys-tem are very hot while the engine isrunning or immediately after the engineis turned off. Keep away from the ex-haust system and catalytic, you may getburned.Also, do not remove the heat sink aroundthe exhaust system, do not seal thebottom of the vehicle or do not coat the

vehicle for corrosion control. It maypresent a fire risk under certain condi-tions.

! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.

o Maintain the engine in good operatingcondition. Extremely high catalyticconverter temperatures can resultfrom improper operation of the elec-trical, ignition or multiport electronicfuel injection.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, oris hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the problemas soon as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may causethe engine to misfire and result indamage to the catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.



7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

!o Do not touch the catalytic converter

or any other part of the exhaust sys-tem while the catalytic converter ishot. Shut off the engine, wait for atleast one hour before touching thecatalytic converter or any other partof the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealeris your best source of assistance.

o Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleover any combustible material such

as grass, paper, leaves or rags. Thesematerials might contact the hot cata-lytic converter and a fire might result.

WARNING:



Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tires and Wheels .......................................................... 8-2Spare Tire and Tools................................................... 8-15Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-15Consumer Information................................................. 8-15Reporting Safety Defects............................................ 8-17Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17

8 8

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS



8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

OTG080002L

All specifications (sizes and pressures)

can be found on a label attached to thedriver’s side center pillar.

!WARNING - Tire

underinflationSevere underinflation can lead tosevere heat build-up, causing blow-

outs, tread separation and other tirefailures that can result in the loss ofvehicle control leading to severe in-jury or death. This risk is muchhigher on hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.

! CAUTION:

o Underinflation also results in ex-cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.

! CAUTION:o Warm tires normally exceed rec-

ommended cold tire pressures by4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do notrelease air from warm tires to ad-just the pressure or the tires willbe underinflated.

o Be sure to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve caps. Without the valvecap, dirt or moisture could get

into the valve core and cause airleakage. If a valve cap is missing,install a new one as soon as pos-sible.

!WARNING - Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can

reduce tire life, adversely affect ve-hicle handling, and lead to suddentire failure. This could result in lossof vehicle control and potential in-jury.



8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

4

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tires

are properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air until

you reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gage. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture

!WARNING:

o Inspect your tires frequently forproper inflation as well as wearand damage. Always use a tirepressure gauge.

o Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehiclecontrol, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, and

even death. The recommendedcold tire pressure for your vehiclecan be found in this manual andon the tire label located on thedriver's side center pillar.

o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, showuneven wear, or are damaged.

o Remember to check the pressure

of your spare tire. HYUNDAI rec-ommends that you check the spareevery time you check the pressureof the other tires on your vehicle.

! CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:o Check tire pressure when the tires

are cold. (After vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours orhasn't been driven more than onemile (1.6 km) since startup.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your vehicle. Becareful not to overload a vehicleluggage rack if your vehicle isequipped with one.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.



dirt and moisture.


5

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner ifirregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires for cor-rect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or se-vere cornering. Look for bumps or bulgesin the tread or side of tire. Replace thetire if you find either of these conditions.Replace the tire if fabric or cord isvisible. After rotation, be sure to bringthe front and rear tire pressures tospecification and check lug nut tight-ness.

S2BLA790

With a full-size spare tire (If Installed) Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

NOTE:Rotate radial tires that have an asym-metric tread pattern only from frontto rear and not from right to left.

!WARNING:

o Do not use the temporary sparetire for tire rotation.

o Do not mix bias ply and radial plytires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, severe injury, or propertydamage.

S2BLA790A

Without a spare tire

CBGQ0707A

Directional tire (If Installed)




6

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to

give you the longest tire life and bestoverall performance.In most cases, you will not need to haveyour wheels aligned again. However, ifyou notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling one way or the other, thealignment may need to be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

! CAUTION:Improper wheel weights can dam-age your vehicle's aluminum wheels.Use only approved wheel weights.

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replacing

the tire.

!WARNING:

To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accident causedby tire failure or loss of vehicle con-trol:o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-trol, and traction.

o Do not drive your vehicle with toolittle or too much pressure in yourtires. This can lead to uneven wearand tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias-ply tires on thesame car. You must replace alltires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.

o Using tires and wheel other thanthe recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle control,resulting in a serious accident.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator




7

o Wheels that do not meet HYUNDAI’sspecifications may fit poorly andresult in damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.

o The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. Tire size canaffect wheel speed. When replac-ing tires, all 4 tires must use thesame size originally supplied withthe vehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESC (Elec-tronic Stability Control) to work irregularly.

Temporary spare tire replacement

A temporary spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire. Re-

place it when you can see the treadwear indicator bars on the tire. Thereplacement temporary spare tire shouldbe the same size and design tire as theone provided with your new vehicle andshould be mounted on the same tempo-rary spare tire wheel.The temporary spare tire is not de-signed to be mounted on a regular sizewheel, and the temporary spare tirewheel is not designed for mounting aregular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the new wheels

are equivalent to the original factoryunits in diameter, rim width and offset.

WARNING:A wheel that is not the correct sizemay adversely affect wheel and bear-ing life, braking and stopping abili-ties, handling characteristics, groundclearance, body-to-tire clearance,snow chain clearance, speedometerand odometer calibration, headlightaim and bumper height.

!




8

I030B04JM

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and describesthe fundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides the tire identifica-tion number (TIN) for safety standardcertification. The TIN can be used toidentify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need this

information when selecting replacementtires for your car.The following explains what the lettersand numbers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designatorcould vary depending on your vehicle.)

P225/60R16 97V

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix “P’’ are intended for

use on passenger cars or light trucks;how ever, not all tires have thismarking).

225 - Tire width in millimeters.60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

(1)

(5) (6)

(7)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperly

inflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire should always

be rebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.




9

16 - Rim diameter in inches.97 - Load Index, a numerical code associ ated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section foradditional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with importantinformation that you need if you everhave to replace one. The following ex-plains what the letters and numbers inthe wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:6.5JX16

6.5 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the differ-ent speed ratings currently being used

for passenger car tires. The speed rat-ing is part of the tire size designation onthe sidewall of the tire. This symbolcorresponds to that tire's designedmaximum safe operating speed.

Speed RatingSymbol

Maximum Speed

S

T

H

V

Z

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identifica- tion Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date, (in-cluding the spare tire) should be re-

placed by new ones. You can find themanufacturing date on the tire sidewall(possibly on the inside of the wheel),displaying the DOT Code. The DOTCode is a series of numbers on a tireconsisting of numbers and English let-ters.

The manufacturing date is designatedby the last four digits (characters) of theDOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plantcode number, tire size and tread patternand the last four numbers indicate weekand year manufactured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1610 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2010.

!WARNING - Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used.Regardless of the remaining tread, itis recommended that tires generallybe replaced after six (6) years of

normal service. Heat caused by hotclimates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow this warn-ing can result in sudden tire failure,which could lead to a loss of controland an accident involving seriousinjury or death.



ju y o dea


10

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum sectionwidth.For example:TREAD wear 200TRACTION AATEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one-and-a-half times (1½)as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires de-pends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

!WARNING:

The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. Thetires available as standard or optional

equipment on your vehicle may varywith respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of as-phalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufac-

turers also must indicate the materialsin the tire, which include steel, nylon,polyester, and others. The letter "R"means radial ply construction; the letter"D" means diagonal or bias ply con-struction; and the letter "B" meansbelted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure This number is the greatest amount ofair pressure that should be put in thetire. Do not exceed the maximum per-missible inflation pressure. Refer to theTire and Loading Information label forrecommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds that canbe carried by the tire. When replacingthe tires on the vehicle, always use atire that has the same load rating as thefactory installed tire.




11

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the high-est), B and C representing the tire’s

resistance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tem-perature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

!WARNING - Tire

temperatureThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure.This can cause loss of vehicle con-

trol and serious injury or death.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure:The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Air

pressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transaxle,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt:A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire in which

the plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.




14

! WARNING - Snow or iceo When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

o If you hear noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles (0.5~1.0 km).

o Do not use tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels.In unavoidable circumstance, usea wire type chain.

o Use wire chains less than 0.59inches (15 mm) to prevent damage

to the chain’s connection.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved treadlife, road hazard resistance and smoother

high speed ride. The radial-ply tires usedon this vehicle are of belted construction,and are selected to complement the rideand handling characteristics of your ve-hicle. Radial-ply tires have the same loadcarrying capacity, as bias-ply or biasbelted tires of the same size, and use thesame recommended inflation pressure.Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or

bias belted tires is not recommended.Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on thesame vehicle will seriously deterioratevehicle handling. The best rule to followis: Identical radial-ply tires should al-ways be used as a set of four.Longer wearing tires can be more sus-ceptible to irregular tread wear. It is veryimportant to follow the tire rotation inter-val shown in this section to achieve thetread life potential of these tires. Cutsand punctures in radial-ply tires are re-pairable only in the tread area, becauseof sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealerfor radial-ply tire repairs.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels.Be sure that the chains are installed inaccordance with the manufacturer's in-structions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when they

are no longer needed.




15CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulations is-sued by the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration of the U.S. Department ofTransportation. It provides the purchasersand/or prospective purchasers of Hyundaiautomobiles with information on uniformtire quality grading. Your Hyundai dealerwill help answer any questions you mayhave as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle's specific warranty coverage.

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWrench bar (1)Jack (2)Wheel nut wrench (3)Tool receptacle (4)

7I100A01NF-A

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available fromyour authorized Hyundai dealer. It's writ-ten for professional technicians, but issimple enough for most mechanically-in-clined owners to understand.




16

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Mary-land, North Carolina, South Carolina, Vir-ginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkan-sas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico,Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wis-consin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region1705 Sequoia Drive

Aurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,California, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Ne-vada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyo-ming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

I130D05A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed andmanufactured to meet or exceed all appli-cable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urgeyou to read and follow all directions in thisOwner's Manual, particularly the informa-tion under the headings "NOTE", "CAU-TION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of yourvehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Office

as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151




17REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTS

I130C03A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,SE., West Building, Washington, DC20590. You can also obtain other informa-tion about motor vehicle safety from http:/

/www.safercar.gov.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court having jurisdiction.

You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://

warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe American Arbitration Association(AAA).

You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

BINDING ARBITRATION(U.S.A only)



9

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9



9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A01TG-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J060A01TG-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01TG-AAT

POWER STEERING

J030A01TG-AAT

TIREin.(mm)

Fuel tank capacity 19.8 U.S.gal (16.4 Imp.gal, 75 liters)

J050A01TG-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid disc

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.74 in. (146 mm)

Vane type

193.3 (4910)

72.8 (1850)

58.6 (1490)*1 /58.8 (1495)*2

109.4 (2780)

62.2 (1580)

61.6 (1565)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Full size tire

Temporary spare tire

(If installed)

Tire size

P225/60R16 or P235/55R17

Inflation pressure

210kPa (30psi)

NOTE:It is permissible to add 3psi (21kPa) to the standard tirepressure specification if colder temperatures are expectedsoon. Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F (-11°C)

temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are ex-pected, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep themproperly inflated.

*1 : with P225/60R16 tire*2 : with P235/55R17 tire

T125/80D16 420kPa (60psi)



9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

3.8L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.77 x 3.42 (96 x 87)

230.5 (3,778)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

0.007 in. (0.2 mm)

0.011 in. (0.3 mm)

650 ± 100

BTDC 11° ± 5°

ENGINE

J070A03TG-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in.(mm)

Displacement cu.in.(cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (warm engine) Intake

Exhaust

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (Base)

3.3L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.62 x 3.29 (92 x 83.8)

203.9 (3,342)



9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API Service SM* or above, SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

ILSAC GF-4 or above SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))

SK ATF SP-IV, MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV

or other brands meeting the above specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

PSF-4DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A03TG-AAT

Quantity

Drain and refill ; 5.49 US qt. (5.2l)

11.51 US qt. (10.9l)

3.3 Engine - 8.24 US qt. (7.8l)

3.8 Engine - 8.14 US qt. (7.7l)

0.95 US qt. (0.9l)

As required

Item

Engine Oil

Recommends

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steeringBrake fluid

Automatic

* : If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.



10

INDEX

10



10 INDEX

6

Trunk Lid .......................................................................... 1-114

Trunk lid control button ................................................. 1-114

V

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-23

Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1

Vehicle Weight ................................................................... 2-29

W

Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-68

Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-15

Windows ............................................................................. 1-14

Window lock .................................................................... 1-16

Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................... 1-89

Auto wiper operation ...................................................... 1-90

Intermittent wiper operation ............................................ 1-91

Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-91

Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-91

Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................... 6-8

manual azera 2011

Documents